QUADRIFOGLIO OWNER’S MANUAL OWNER’S 2019 QUADRIFOGLIO

2019 STELVIO QUADRIFOGLIO Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GUQUAD-126-AB 19GUQUAD-126-AB ROMEO STELVIO ALFA QUADRIFOGLIO Second Edition Manual Owner’s VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please DRIVING AND ALCOHOL disregard any features and equipment described in this Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of manual that are not on this vehicle. accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- portation. factured.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact: Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada): P.O.Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, refer to "Fuel Requirements" in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material, as doing so is a fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment (if equipped).

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. Rollover Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

010301031 Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional equipment meant for specific markets or particular models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped. The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some vehicle components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

COMPONENT CAN START READ THE OWNER’S DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO MANUAL HANDS WHEN ENGINE IS OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

0201132312US Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Mirrors 2 — Engine Compartment 5 — Doors 3 — Windshield 6 — Wheels And Tires

11 REAR VIEW

0201132313US Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Liftgate

12 INSTRUMENT PANEL

0201132314US Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 3 — Steering Wheel 5 — Windshield Wiper 7 — Information and 9 — Glove Compartment Stalk Entertainment System 2 — Paddle Shifters 4 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Air Vents 8 — Climate Controls 10 — Passenger-Side Air Bag

13 VEHICLE INTERIOR

0203132504US Vehicle Interior 1 — Door Handle 4 — Seats 2 — Hazard Warning Lights 5 — Information and Entertainment System Rotary Pad 3 — Gear Selector

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 16 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 19 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 20 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 21 DOORS...... 23 SEATS...... 28 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 33 STEERING WHEEL ...... 35 MIRRORS ...... 36 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 38 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 41 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 43 HEADLAMP WASHERS...... 45 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 46 POWERWINDOWS...... 52 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . .54 HOOD...... 55 POWER LIFTGATE ...... 56 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 61

15 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Unlocking The Doors And The Liftgate By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and liftgate, and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from the The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is Information and Entertainment System). you to lock or unlock the doors and immediately deactivated. liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from Push and release the unlock button on the a distance. The key fob does not need to key fob once to unlock the driver side be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! front door or twice within one second to system. unlock all doors and the liftgate. It is, however, possible to change the Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply current setting through the Information the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, and Entertainment System menu, so that remove the key fob from the vehicle and the system unlocks: lock your vehicle. All doors on the first push of the key Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or fob unlock button. with access to an unlocked vehicle. The driver door on the first push of the Allowing children to be in a vehicle key fob unlock button. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously The liftgate "independently" or "with or fatally injured. Children should be warned doors". 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal Key Fob or the gear selector. Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/unlocking the doors, and PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the activation of the courtesy light upon The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to unlocking the doors, can be activated or Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power deactivated through the Information and this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Entertainment System. For further will sound. information, refer to the Information and To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Entertainment System Owner’s Manual hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat Supplement. build-up may cause serious injury or death. second. When the panic alarm is active, The doors can also be unlocked by using the headlights turn on, the turn signals the emergency key, located inside the flash, the horn honks intermittently, and key fob. all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 16 Door And Liftgate Locking To activate, push the lock or unlock Briefly pushing the lock button on the key button to remotely and temporarily fob will lock the doors and liftgate, switch activate the turn signals and headlights. off the internal lights, and flash the turn Pushing the lock or unlock button again signals (if activated in the Information will reactivate the lights switch on timer and Entertainment System). (if the parking lights function was already If one or more doors are open, these active, it will remain active). doors will also lock, and this is indicated This function is available only if the doors by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The are closed. doors will unlock again only if the key fob is detected inside the passenger 04016S0002EM compartment. Key Fob Cover Removal The doors can be locked by using the 2. Remove the emergency key from its emergency key in the driver’s side door housing. lock. Opening The Liftgate Rapidly push the button on the key fob twice to open the liftgate. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the liftgate has been opened. 04016S0099EM Key Fob Remote Start The remote start Replacing The Electronic Key Fob button on the key fob Battery enables engine starting To replace the battery, proceed as (push the remote start follows: 04016S0003EM button on the key fob Removing Emergency Key twice to enable engine 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward starting). and extract the cover pulling downwards. Car Finder The Car Finder feature will temporarily activate the turn signals and headlights to assist with locating the vehicle in a crowded area.

17 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it Note: Changes or modifications not counter clockwise. expressly approved by the party Caution! responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the The battery replacement operation must be equipment. done with care, in order not to damage the electronic key.

Request For Additional Keys The system can recognize up to eight key fobs with remote control. To guarantee that the engine starts and 04016S0004EM the vehicle operates correctly, use only Removing Battery Plug electronic key fobs specifically coded for 4. Remove the battery from its slot and the vehicle’s electronics. replace it with a new one of the same If an electronic key fob is coded for a type. vehicle, it cannot be used on any other vehicle. General Information GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 04016S0005EM Battery Location 1. This device may not cause harmful Proceed in reverse order to reassemble interference, and the key. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 18 IGNITION SYSTEM Note: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Operation With the keyless ignition in the ON position: if 30 minutes pass with the Do not leave the key fob in or near the To activate the keyless ignition, the key gear selector in P (Park) and the engine vehicle, (or in a location accessible to fob must be inside the vehicle. children), and do not leave the ignition in the stopped, the keyless ignition will AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate automatically reset to the STOP power windows, other controls, or move the position. vehicle. With the engine started, it is possible Be sure the parking brake is fully to remove the key fob from the vehicle. disengaged before driving; failure to do so The engine will remain running and the can lead to brake failure and a collision. instrument cluster will indicate the Always fully apply the parking brake when absence of the key fob when the door is leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause closed. damage or injury. Also be certain to leave For more information on engine start-up, the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting damage or injury. 0101132119US And Operating." Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button Driving the vehicle with the parking brake The keyless ignition has the following engaged, or repeated use of the parking modes: Warning! brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system. STOP: engine off, steering locked. Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Never use the PARK position as a locking system, alarm, etc.) are still substitute for the parking brake. Always Caution! available. apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and ON: all electrical devices are available. possible injury or damage. If the Brake System Warning Light remains This state can be entered by pushing the on with the parking brake released, a brake ignition button once, without pressing the When exiting the vehicle, always make system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake pedal. sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove brake system serviced by an authorized the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your dealer immediately. AVV: engine starting. This state can be vehicle. entered by pushing the ignition button Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or once while pressing the brake pedal. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to 19 Starting With A Discharged Key Fob General Information ENGINE IMMOBILIZER Battery The following regulatory statement Engine Immobilizer Operation If the key fob battery is discharged, applies to all radio frequency (RF) proceed as follows to start the vehicle: devices equipped in this vehicle: The Engine Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle by 1. Lift the front armrest. This device complies with Part 15 of the disabling engine starting. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline license-exempt RSS standard(s). The system does not need to be enabled found on the floor of the armrest Operation is subject to the following two or activated. Operation of the compartment while pushing the conditions: immobilizer is automatic whether the START/STOP button to start the ignition. vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. 1. This device may not cause harmful When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine interference, and Immobilizer system identifies the code 2. This device must accept any transmitted by the key. If the code is interference received, including recognized as valid, the Engine interference that may cause undesired Immobilizer system enables engine operation. starting. When the ignition is brought back to Note: Changes or modifications not STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system expressly approved by the party deactivates the engine control unit, responsible for compliance could void the disabling engine starting.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE user’s authority to operate the equipment. For the correct engine starting 04026V0002EM procedures, refer to “Starting The Key Fob Placement Location Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped Yourvehicle may be equipped with a passive electronic steering wheel lock. The steering wheel lock is engaged when the driver door is opened with the ignition OFF.The steering wheel lock releases when the ignition is cycled ON.

20 Irregular Operation All keys provided with the vehicle SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — If the key code is not recognized during have been programmed in accordance IF EQUIPPED starting, the Engine Immobilizer with the electronics on the vehicle itself. Alarm Activation — If Equipped Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is Each key has its own code which must displayed on the instrument panel (refer be stored by the system's control unit. The vehicle security alarm monitors the to "Warning Lights And Messages" in Contact an authorized dealer to have vehicle doors and ignition for "Getting To Know YourInstrument new keys (up to eight) stored with a unauthorized operation. When the vehicle Panel"). This condition leads to the engine code. security alarm is activated, interior turning off after two seconds. In this switches for door locks are disabled. The case, switch the ignition to STOP and system provides both audible and visible then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with signals. the other keys provided. If it is still not While armed, the alarm will sound in the possible to start the engine, contact an following scenarios: authorized dealer. Opening of doors/hood/liftgate If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ (perimeter protection) Break-in Attempt icon is displayed while driving, this means that the system Operation of ignition with a key which is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a is not validated voltage drop). If the display persists, Cutting of the battery cables contact an authorized dealer. Movement inside the passenger Note: compartment (volumetric protection — if Do not tamper with the Engine equipped) Immobilizer system. Any modifications Unexpected lifting/tilting of the or alterations could cause the protection vehicle (anti-lift protection — if function to be deactivated. equipped) The Engine Immobilizer system is not Activation of the alarm triggers the compatible with certain aftermarket acoustic warning and the turn signals. remote starting systems. The use of Note: The alarm system is activated by these devices could cause problems the Engine Immobilizer system, which is when starting, as well as the automatically activated when you get out deactivation of the protection function. of the vehicle with the key fob and lock the doors.

21 To Arm The Alarm If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even To ensure the correct operation of the when the doors, hood, and liftgate are Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, With the doors, hood, and liftgate closed correctly closed, a fault has occurred in completely close the side windows. and the keyless ignition system placed in system operation. In this case, contact an the STOP position, push and release the To disable the function, push the authorized dealer. lock button on the key fob. The alarm can Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button also be armed by pushing the Passive To Disarm The Alarm before activating the alarm. Entry door handle button, located on the Push the unlock button on the key fob to exterior door handle. Refer to "Doors" in disarm the alarm. While disarming, the "Getting To Know YourVehicle” for following operations are performed: further information. Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if When the alarm is armed, the warning programmed). lights on the door handle trim remain on. Two brief acoustic signals (if programmed). Doors are unlocked. The alarm can also be disarmed using the

Passive Entry System, by grasping one of 04046S0002EM the Passive Entry front door handles with Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For further information refer to "Passive When the function is disabled, this is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Entry" in "Doors." indicated by the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button Note: The alarm does not disarm when flashing for several seconds. the doors are unlocked by inserting the 0101132129US blade of the emergency key into the door Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Lock/Unlock Switches handle lock cylinder. Protection must be repeated each time The activation of the alarm is preceded the ignition is cycled off. Anti-Lift Protection — If Equipped by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive The vehicle security alarm system detected, the system emits a further Entry acoustic signal. monitors the doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the ignition To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. If a second acoustic signal is emitted switch for unauthorized operation. during a long period of vehicle inactivity), after the alarm is already armed, wait insert the blade of the emergency key, To ensure the correct operation of the about four seconds and disarm the alarm found inside the key fob, into the door protection, completely close the side by pushing the unlock switch. Verify that handle lock cylinder and turn the windows. If a perimeter violation triggers the doors, hood, and liftgate are closed emergency key to the right (clockwise) to the security system, the alarm will sound correctly. Then, reactivate the system by lock the door(s). pushing the lock switch. and the exterior lights will flash. 22 DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Warning! Caution! Inside If all doors are closed properly, they will Do not leave children or animals inside An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always automatically lock once the vehicle has parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat remove the key from the ignition and lock all exceeded approximately 12 MPH build-up may cause serious injury or death. of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). For personal security and safety in the Push the interior lock button on the driver event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as or passenger side door panel trim to lock you drive as well as when you park and leave Locking/Unlocking Doors From The the doors. the vehicle. Outside Push the interior lock button on the rear Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When locking the doors from the outside automatic transmission into PARK, apply door panel trim to lock the rear doors with the doors closed, push the lock only. the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and button on the key fob. With doors locked, push the unlock lock your vehicle. The door lock can be activated with all button on the interior trim panel to doors locked and the liftgate open. When unlock the doors. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the lock button on the key fob is pushed, all locks are activated, including the Allowing children to be in a vehicle liftgate if it is open. The liftgate will be unattended is dangerous for a number of locked when it is closed. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned When unlocking the doors from the not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal outside, push the unlock button on the or the gear selector. key fob. Do not leave the key fob in or near the Locking/Unlocking Doors From The vehicle, or in a location accessible to Outside In An Emergency children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the If the battery is discharged or the key fob vehicle. is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the 0101132136US doors from the outside by inserting the Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel blade of the emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder and turn the emergency key as follows. Lock — Turn the emergency key to the right (clockwise) 23 Unlock — Turn the emergency key to Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained the left (counter clockwise) and the door handle is wet, the activation sensitivity of the Passive Entry function Passive Entry may be reduced, resulting in a longer The Passive Entry system can identify reaction time. the presence of a key fob near the doors Door Locking and liftgate. To lock the doors, proceed as follows: The system enables the doors and liftgate to be locked or unlocked without 1. Make sure that you have the key fob pushing any button on the key fob. and are close to the driver’s or The key fob is detected only after the passenger’s side door handle. 04056V0005EM system recognizes the presence of a 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle External Liftgate Release Button hand on one of the front door handles. If button or the Passive Entry liftgate Note: After pushing the Passive Entry the detected key fob is valid, the doors button, which is located next to the door handle button, you must wait two and the liftgate are unlocked (refer to the external liftgate release button. This will seconds before the doors can be Information and Entertainment System lock all doors and the liftgate. Door unlocked again using the passive entry Owner’s Manual Supplement for Passive locking will activate the alarm as well. door handle button. This feature makes it Entry Settings). possible to check whether the vehicle has Note: The key fob may not be able to be been locked correctly by pulling the door detected by the vehicle keyless-go handle within two seconds. The doors will GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE system if it is located next to a mobile not be unlocked again. phone, laptop, or other electronic device; The vehicle doors and liftgate can be these devices may block the key fob’s locked by pushing the lock button on the wireless signal and prevent the key fob or on the interior door lock. keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening Grasping the handle of the driver's door If the key fob does not work, e.g. because unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors its battery is discharged or the vehicle depending on the mode set using the 0101132144US battery is discharged, the emergency key Information and Entertainment System Passive Entry Door Handle Button can be used to unlock the driver side (refer to the Information and door. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual To remove the emergency key from the Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). key fob, proceed as follows: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and extract the cover pulling downwards. 24 2. Remove the emergency key from the To avoid leaving the key fob inside key fob housing. the vehicle accidentally, the Passive Entry function features an automatic 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver door unlocking function. side door lock cylinder and turn it to the left (counter clockwise) to unlock the Once all of the vehicle doors are door. closed and locked, the vehicle will attempt to locate the key fob inside or outside of the vehicle.

0101132145US Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking If the key fob is detected inside the vehicle, the Passive Entry function automatically unlocks all the vehicle doors and flashes the turn signals. 04016S0002EM Emergency Key Release Buttons If one or more key fobs are inside the

0101132144US passenger compartment, the lock button Passive Entry Door Handle Button on the key fob inside the passenger compartment is temporarily disabled. The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an unauthorized key fob has been detected close to the outside of the vehicle. If the Passive Entry function is disabled using the Information and Entertainment System, the keyless-go system to avoid accidentally leaving the key fob inside the vehicle is deactivated. 04016S0003EM Emergency Key Note: 0101132136US Interior Lock Switch Panel The emergency key blade is not directional and can be inserted While pulling the handle, do not push the indifferently into the lock. door lock/unlock button on the handle. 25 Liftgate Access On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, 2. This device must accept any Approaching the liftgate with a valid key the liftgate and the doors can be locked interference received, including fob, push the opening button to open the by pushing the button located near the interference that may cause undesired liftgate. opening button of the liftgate. operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Power Lock The power lock is a safety device that prevents the operation of the interior door handles and the door lock and unlock buttons. The power lock also 04056V0005EM 04056V0005EM prevent opening of the doors from inside External Liftgate Release Button Passive Entry Liftgate Button the passenger compartment. Note: System Activation/Deactivation It is recommended to lock the vehicle The Passive Entry system can be If the key fob is inadvertently doors each time the vehicle is parked. activated or deactivated using the forgotten inside of the cargo area, and Activating The Power Lock GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Information and Entertainment System. an attempt is made to close it from The power lock is enabled on all the doors outside, the liftgate will not lock. With General Information by quickly pushing the lock button on the the doors locked, the liftgate unlocked, The following regulatory statement key fob twice. and the key fob detected inside the applies to all radio frequency (RF) vehicle, the liftgate will unlock again and The turn signals will flash to let you know devices equipped in this vehicle: the lights flash twice. that the power lock is active. This device complies with Part 15 of the If one or more of the doors are not closed Before driving, make sure the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada correctly, the power lock will not activate, liftgate is closed correctly. license-exempt RSS standard(s). preventing a person from getting stuck Operation is subject to the following two Liftgate Lock inside the passenger compartment by conditions: entering the vehicle, and then closing, the The liftgate of the vehicle may still be open door. locked by pushing the lock button on the 1. This device may not cause harmful key fob, pushing the door lock button on interference, and the door handles, or pushing the lock button on the interior door panel of the vehicle. 26 Deactivating The Power Lock Note: The rear doors cannot be opened Push the unlock button on the door The power lock disengages from the inside when the Child Safety panel Lock is engaged. automatically: Unlock driver’s door lock with the When the doors are unlocked, pushing Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged emergency key Battery the unlock button on the key fob. Operate the internal door handle When the keyless ignition is placed in Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if Note: For the rear doors, if the Child the ON position. the vehicle battery is discharged. Safety Locks are engaged, and the previously described locking procedure is Child Safety Locks 1. With the doors unlocked insert the emergency key from the key fob into the carried out, operating the internal handle To provide a safer environment for small door lock manual release lock cylinder. will not open the door. Instead, it will only children riding in the rear seats, the rear realign the lock release device. To open doors are equipped with a the door, the outside handle must be Child-Protection Door Lock system. used. The door central locking/unlocking This device can only be engaged with the buttons are not deactivated when the doors open. emergency lock is engaged.

04056S0008EM Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder clockwise for the right door locks or 04056S0007EM counterclockwise for the left door locks. Child Safety Lock Positions Lock position: device locked (door 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the opened from exterior only) manual release lock. Proceed in one of the following ways to Unlock position: device unlocked (door realign the door lock device (only when may be opened from the inside) the battery charge has been restored): The Child Safety Locks remain locked even if the doors are unlocked. Push the lock button on the electronic key 27 SEATS Power Front Seats The front seats can be adjusted to ensure Note: The conformation of the seats maximum comfort for the occupants. may vary according to the versions. When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep The power seat switch is located on the the shoulders resting firmly against the outboard side of the seat near the floor. backrest, the wrists within reach of the Use this switch to move the driver's seat top of the steering wheel, and the seat up, down, forward, and rearward, or to close enough to allow the driver to fully recline the seatback. depress the brake pedal.

0403142697US Warning! Manual Seat Adjustment 1 — Adjustment Lever It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, 2 — Height Adjustment Button inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 3 — Recline Lever people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Height Adjustment Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Push upward on the height adjustment 04306V0005EM button to raise the seat height, or push Power Seat Adjustment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously downward on the button to lower the injured or killed. seat height. 1 — Seat Switch (For/Rear/Height Ad- justment) Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a Seatback Recline 2 — Seatback Switch seat and using a seat belt properly. To adjust the seatback, lift the recline 3 — Lumbar Adjustment lever located on the outboard side of the 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons (If Sparco Racing Seats — If Equipped seat, lean back to the desired position Equipped) and release the lever. To return the Forward/Rearward Adjustment seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and The adjustment lever is at the front of the release the lever. seat, near the floor. Pull the lever upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. 28 Height Adjustment Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped Caution! The height of the seats can be adjusted Lift the adjustment lever and push the up or down. Pull upward or push front of the cushion forward or rearward downward on the seat switch, and the to extend the cushion by a few inches Do not place any article under a power seat seat will move in the direction of the (centimeters). or impede its ability to move as it may cause switch. Release the switch when the damage to the seat controls. Seat travel desired position is reached. may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If Equipped Forward/Rearward Adjustment The seat angle can be adjusted in four directions. Lift or push the front part of Push the seat switch forward or rearward seat switch to move the front part of the to adjust to your desired position. seat in the corresponding direction. Seatback Recline Release the seat switch when the seat The angle of the seatback can be has reached the desired position. adjusted forward or rearward. Push the Power Bolster Adjustment — If 04306V0011EM Seat Cushion Extension seatback switch forward or rearward, Equipped and the seat will move in the direction of Push the power bolster adjustment 6 — Adjustment Lever the switch. Release the switch when the buttons to regulate the width of the desired position is reached. backrest through the lateral padding. Power Lumbar — If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

29 Driver Memory Seat Heated Seats — If Equipped The driver memory seat buttons can Front Heated Seats store and recall three different driver’s With the engine in the ON position, push seat positions, as well as outside power the driver or passenger heated seat mirror positions. Storing and recalling button located on the instrument can be done with the ignition in the ON panel. mode, vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side door closed, or for 3 minutes after having opened the driver's side door. An audible chime is heard to confirm a memory profile is set 0403132208US or recalled. To set a memory profile, first Driver Memory Seat Buttons Location adjust your seat (and power mirror position if desired) until you are in the desired position. Then, push the memory Warning! button you want to assign the set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a new Adjusting a seat while driving may be seat position is memorized, the 0403132204US previously memorized position on the dangerous. Moving a seat while driving Heated Seat Buttons same button is automatically could result in loss of control which could overwritten. Recalling a memorized cause a collision and serious injury or death. Youcan select three heating levels: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE position can also be done for Seats should be adjusted before Maximum — Three LED indicators approximately 3 minutes after the doors fastening the seat belts and while the illuminated on the buttons are opened and for approximately vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death 1 minute after the engine is stopped. To could result from a poorly adjusted seat Average — Two LED indicators recall a memorized position, push the belt. illuminated on the buttons assigned button briefly. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so Minimum — One LED indicator that the shoulder belt is no longer resting illuminated on the buttons against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result After selecting a heating level, heat will in serious injury or death. be felt within a few minutes. A quick push of the heated seat button will select the heat levels in order of highest to lowest. A fourth push of the button will turn the heated seat off.

30 The “Minimum” setting is automatically Note: To preserve the battery charge, Split Folding Rear Seat deactivated once a certain period of time these functions cannot be activated The rear seat allows the luggage has elapsed. This varies on a when the engine is OFF. compartment to be partially (40/20/40) case-by-case basis, in accordance with or totally extended. the specific operating conditions. Warning! Note: The heated seat function can only be activated in temperatures below 39°F (4°C). Persons who are unable to feel pain to the Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, On models that are equipped with remote medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other start, the front heated seats can be physical condition must exercise care when programmed to come on during remote using the seat heater. It may cause burns start. The feature can be activated even at low temperatures, especially if used through the Information and for long periods of time. Entertainment System. Refer to the Do not place anything on the seat or Information and Entertainment System seatback that insulates against heat, such 0403132218US Owner’s Manual Supplement for further as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the Split Folding Rear Seat information. seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Partial Extension Of The Luggage that has been overheated could cause Compartment (40/20/40) Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped serious burns due to the increased surface If equipped with rear heated seats, the temperature of the seat. Extending the right side of the luggage controls can be found on the rear of the compartment allows you to carry two center console and will function the same passengers on the left part of the rear as the front heated seat controls. seat, while extending the left side allows you to carry one passenger. Proceed as follows: 1. Completely lower the rear seat head restraints. 2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't impede the movement of the backrest while tilting it.

04046V0002EM Rear Heated Seat Buttons 31 3. Pull the left-hand seat back release 3. Pull both seat back release levers to lever (inside the luggage compartment or fold down the backrests. They will fold Warning! the release at the base of the rear seat forward automatically. If necessary, accessible from the rear doors) to fold assist the backrests during the initial down the left side, or the right-hand seat stage of tilting. Be certain that the seatback is securely back release lever to fold down the right It is also possible to disengage the locked into position. If the seatback is not side of the backrest. It will fold forwards sections of the rear seat from inside the securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats automatically. If necessary, assist the luggage compartment or by using one of backrest during the initial stage of tilting. and/or passengers. An improperly latched the two levers located below the rear seat could cause serious injury. seat. Each lever folds down the section of the backrest on the same side. Central Backrest Section Tilting Before tilting the backrest, make sure that the rear center seat belt is not fastened and that there aren't any objects on the seat itself (if there are any, remove them). Pull the release strap upward to release the central part of the backrest from its

0403132222US housing and tilt it forward using the head GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Seat Back Release Lever In Luggage restraint. Compartment 0403132223US Full Expansion Of The Luggage Seat Back Release Lever Below Rear Compartment Seat Tilting the rear seat completely forward Repositioning The Backrests allows for maximum loading volume. Move the seat belts to the side, making Proceed as follows: sure that they are correctly extended and 1. Completely lower the rear seat head not twisted. Also make sure that they are restraints. not caught on anything behind the backrests of the seats. Then, lift the 2. Place the seat belt so that it doesn't backrests by pushing them rearward until 0403132219US impede the movement of the backrest you hear the lock click into place on both Center Backrest Section Tilting while tilting it. attachment mechanisms.

32 Central Backrest Section Repositioning HEAD RESTRAINTS Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) Using the head restraint, lift the central Head restraints are designed to reduce Note: If the vehicle is equipped with portion upwards, manually guiding it back the risk of injury by restricting head Sparco Racing Seats, the head restraints into place. Lightly push to make sure that movement in the event of a rear impact. are not adjustable or removable. it is properly latched. Make sure that the Head restraints should be adjusted so The front head restraints may be armrest is properly latched by gently that the top of the head restraint is height-adjustable. To adjust them, trying to move it. If it is not latched, located above the top of your ear. operate as follows: repeat the operation. Upward adjustment: Pull upward on Easy Entry Function Warning! the head restraint until it clicks into The Easy Entry function is designed to place. retract the driver side seat automatically Downward adjustment: Push the by 2.36 in (60 mm) to make it easier for A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious adjustment button and lower the head the driver to get in and out of the car. injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. restraint at the same time. The movement is activated only if the Always securely stow removed head seat is set to a driving position which is in restraints in a location outside the occupant front of the B pillar of the vehicle. compartment. The function is associated with power ALL the head restraints MUST be front seats for each of the three stored reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect positions. the occupants. Follow the re-installation The Easy Entry function can be instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. activated/deactivated through the Information and Entertainment System. Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of 0403132220US the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of Front Head Restraint a collision and could result in serious injury or death. 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button

33 The height of the outboard head Head Restraints (Removal) restraints can be adjusted. The head Warning! To remove the head restraints, proceed restraint of the center seat, if equipped, as follows: cannot be adjusted, only removed. All occupants, including the driver, should For upward adjustment, pull upward on 1. Recline the seat back to allow not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat the head restraint until it clicks into clearance of the head restraint from the until the head restraints are placed in their place. vehicle’s roof. proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. For downward adjustment, push in the 2. Raise the head restraints to their adjustment button and lower the head maximum height. Head restraints should never be adjusted restraint at the same time to the desired while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a height. 3. Push the adjustment button and the vehicle with the head restraints improperly release button at the side of the two adjusted or removed could cause serious supports at the same time. injury or death in the event of a collision. 4. Pull upward on the head restraint to Note: To allow for maximum visibility for fully remove it. the driver, if a seat is not occupied by a To reinstall the head restraints, proceed passenger, the head restraint can be as follows: lowered to the fully lowered position. 1. Hold down both the adjustment Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) button and release button while placing GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the head restraint posts into the holes.

0403132221US Warning! 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to Rear Head Restraint the appropriate height for the 1 — Release Button passengers. All occupants, including the driver, should 2 — Adjustment Button not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat 3. Replace the seat back to the until the head restraints are placed in their appropriate position for passengers. proper positions in order to minimize the Note: To allow for maximum visibility for risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. the driver, if a seat is not occupied by a Head restraints should never be adjusted passenger, the head restraint should be while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a lowered to the fully lowered position. vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

34 STEERING WHEEL Warning! Steering Wheel Adjustments The steering column is able to be tilted A loose head restraint thrown forward in upward or downward. It also allows you a collision or hard stop could cause serious to lengthen or shorten the steering injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. column. The tilt/telescoping lever is Always securely stow removed head located below the steering wheel at the restraints in a location outside the occupant end of the steering column. compartment. ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect 0403132226US the occupants. Follow the re-installation Steering Wheel Adjustment instructions above prior to operating the 4 — Tilt Movement vehicle or occupying a seat. 5 — Telescoping Movement

Warning!

0403132225US Steering Wheel Adjustment Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while 1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle driving or driving with the steering column 2 — Closed unlocked, could cause the driver to lose 3 — Open control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position: 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 3. Lock the desired position by pushing the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to the closed position. 35 Note: The heated steering wheel MIRRORS function can only be activated in Warning! temperatures below 39°F (4°C). Electrochromic Mirror Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start This mirror automatically adjusts for It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any On models that are equipped with remote headlight glare from vehicles behind you. after-market operation involving steering start, the heated steering wheel can be The electrochromic mirror has a power system or steering column modifications programmed to come on during remote button to activate/deactivate the (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that automatic dimming/anti-glare function. could adversely affect performance. Doing start. The feature can be activated so could void the New Vehicle Limited through the Information and Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY Entertainment System. Refer to the PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also Information and Entertainment System result in the vehicle not meeting Owner’s Manual Supplement for further type-approval requirements. information.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Warning! With the ignition in the ON position, push the heated steering wheel button on Persons who are unable to feel pain to the the instrument panel. skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, 04106S0002EM Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, automatic dimming feature is especially if used for long periods. deactivated. Do not place anything on the steering Outside Power Mirrors wheel that insulates against heat, such as a Power Adjustment blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering The power mirrors can only be adjusted wheel heater to overheat. with the ignition ON.

0403132205US Select the desired mirror by rotating the Heated Steering Wheel Button power mirror control knob to the left (L) or right (R) position. The indicator on the button will illuminate when this feature is enabled.

36 Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex

04106S0004EM 04106S0005EM mirror. Power Mirror Control Folding Mirror 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob Automatic Activation Heated Mirrors A — Left Activating the central door locking Push the rear defrost button, located B — Right system from outside the vehicle within the climate controls, to activate C — Power Folding Position automatically folds the mirrors. The the heated mirrors. D — Neutral mirrors return to the driving position when the vehicle is then unlocked. If the door mirrors were folded using the To adjust the selected mirror, push the power mirror control knob, they can only knob in the direction desired. be returned to the driving position by Note: Once adjustment is complete, rotating the knob again. rotate the knob to the neutral position to Note: The power folding operation can prevent accidental movements. be enabled only when the vehicle speed is Power Folding lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). With the power mirror control knob in the Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If neutral position, rotate it to the power Equipped folding position. Rotate the knob back to Like the electrochromic mirror, an the neutral position to return the mirrors automatic dimming feature is also to the driving position. available on the outside rear view mirrors If the power mirror control knob is moved to prevent glare. The automatic dimming again during door mirror folding (from button for these mirrors is the same as closed to open position and vice versa), the electrochromic mirror. the movement direction is reversed. 37 EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only If equipped, the DRL can be when the ignition is in the ON mode, activated/deactivated from the Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to Information and Entertainment System, The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more by selecting the following functions in of the steering wheel on the instrument information. sequence on the main MENU: panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various 1. “Settings.” of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the dashboard will be instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are 2. “Lights.” light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on. lights. 3. “Daytime Lights.” In addition, there are buttons for parking Automatic Headlights Note: The Daytime Running Lights sensors deactivation and stop/start. This system automatically turns the Refer to “Starting And Operating” for cannot be deactivated in Canadian headlights on or off according to ambient markets. further information. light levels. Rear Fog Lights Function Activation From the O (off) position, rotate the light The rear fog light switch is located within switch to the (auto) position. the headlight switch. Note: The function can only operate with Push the button, located in the center the ignition position cycled to ON. of the headlight switch, to turn the rear fog lights on/off. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Function Deactivation The rear fog lights turn on only when the To deactivate the function, rotate the headlights or parking lights are also light switch to a position other than the turned on. The lights can be turned off by (auto) position. pushing the button again or by turning 04126V0001NA Daytime Running Lights (DRL) the headlight switch to the O (off) Headlight Switch position. With the ignition cycled to ON, and the 1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But- light switch turned to the position, if When the engine is stopped with the rear ton the dusk sensor detects sufficient fog lights on, they will be off the next 2 — Parking Lights, Daytime Running external light, the Daytime Running time the engine is started. Lights, Headlight Switch Lights will turn on automatically while the Parking Lights 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer other lights remain off. With the ignition in STOP mode, rotate 4 — Rear Fog Light Button If the turn signals are operated, the the headlight switch to the position to 5 — Stop/Start Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime turn the parking lights on. All of the Running Lights will be decreased for as parking lights will turn on for eight long as the turn signals are on. 38 minutes, and opening the door activates Note: To activate this function, the an audible warning. headlights must be deactivated within To leave only the lights on one side two minutes after the ignition has been (right/left) illuminated, you must move cycled to the STOP mode. the multifunction lever (located on the Function Deactivation left side of the steering wheel) to the side This function is deactivated by turning on that you want to remain on. With the the headlights, the side lights, or by parking lights on, the warning light on cycling the ignition to ON mode. the instrument panel will illuminate. Note: Cycling the ignition to ON mode Adaptive Headlight System (AFS) turns off the parking lights, which were This is a system combined with Xenon 04126S0020EM only illuminated on one side. headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if Multifunction Lever equipped) which directs the headlights Headlight Off Delay horizontally, and continuously and The high beam headlights are turned off The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays automatically adapts them to the driving by pulling the multifunction lever the turning off of the headlights after the conditions around bends or when rearward to its original position. The vehicle’s engine has been stopped. cornering. warning light/icon will turn off in the instrument panel when the high beams The function can be activated from the The system directs the headlights to light are turned off. Information and Entertainment System up the road in the best way, taking into by selecting the following functions in account the speed of the vehicle and the Flashing The Headlights sequence on the main menu: bend or corner angle, as well as the speed Pulling the multifunction lever toward the of steering. steering wheel will activate the high 1. “Settings.” The adaptive lights are automatically beam headlights manually. The lights will 2. “Lights.” activated when the vehicle is started. remain on as long as the lever is held. Once the lever is released, the lights will 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” High Beam Headlights resume the previous setting. The side lights and the headlights stay on To activate the fixed high beam headlights, push the multifunction lever, Automatic High Beam Headlights — If for a time that can be set between 30, Equipped 60, and 90 seconds. located on the left side of the steering wheel, towards the instrument panel. The The Automatic High Beam Headlights Function Activation headlight switch must first be turned to system provides increased forward With the headlights on, cycle the ignition the (auto) or (on) position. lighting at night by automating high beam to STOP mode and the timer will start. With high beam headlights on, the control through the use of a digital High Beam Indicator on the camera mounted on the windshield. This instrument panel will illuminate. camera detects vehicle specific light and

39 automatically turns from high beams to If the multifunction lever is pushed again The turn signals turn off automatically low beams until the approaching vehicle with the Automatic High Beam when the vehicle is brought back onto a is out of view. Headlights activated, the function straight course. deactivates. This function is enabled when “Automatic “Lane Change” Function High Beam” is turned to “ON” within the This feature can also be deactivated by Tap the lever up or down once, without Information and Entertainment System, rotating the headlight switch to the moving beyond the detent, and the turn and is then activated by rotating the position. signal (right or left) will flash five times. headlight switch to the (auto) Then, the turn signal (right or left) will position and pushing the multifunction Note: automatically turn off. lever toward the instrument panel. If the system recognizes heavy To turn off the flashing before the end of While the high beam headlights are on, traffic areas, the automatic functions the cycle, move the lever in the opposite the blue icon/warning light will remain disabled independently of the direction until the first click (about half illuminate in the instrument panel. vehicle’s speed. way). Note: The “On” selection within the The Automatic High Beam Information and Entertainment System is functionality may also be influenced by: saved if the vehicle is cycled OFF, and then back ON. Reflections on road signs When the speed is higher than 37 mph Dim headlights from oncoming traffic (60 km/h) and the function is active, the Poor weather conditions lights will turn off if the multifunction GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE lever is pushed again. Presence of dirt or other When the speed is lower than 15 mph obstructions on the sensor (25 km/h) and the function is active, the Damage to the windshield feature will turn the high beam headlights off. Turn Signals If the high beam headlights are operated To activate the turn signals, move the again (pushing the multifunction lever multifunction lever, located on the left towards the instrument panel), the side of the steering wheel, up or down warning light/icon will illuminate in the until it reaches the detent. Moving the instrument panel, and the main beam lever upward flashes the right turn signal headlights only will be on until the speed and moving the lever downward will flash exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). the left turn signal. When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is The or turn signal will blink on the exceeded again, the automatic instrument panel. functioning is reactivated. 40 INTERIOR LIGHTS Note: Before exiting the vehicle, ensure When doors are locked (either with key that the overhead lights are off. This will fob or with key inserted on driver side Front Map Reading Lights prevent the battery from discharging door), the overhead light turns off. once the doors are closed. If a light is left The front map/reading and overhead The interior lights will turn off after on accidently, the overhead lights will lights are mounted in the overhead 15 minutes to preserve the battery. console. Each light can be turned on by turn off automatically approximately pushing the corresponding switch on the 15 minutes after the engine has been Timing While Getting Out Of The console. These switches are backlit for cycled OFF. Vehicle — After cycling the ignition to STOP mode, the overhead lights will turn night time visibility. To turn the lights off, Overhead Light Timing push the switch a second time. on as follows: On certain models, to assist getting in For a few seconds after the engine and out of the vehicle at night or in stops. poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have been provided. For approximately three minutes when one of the doors is opened. Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle — The overhead lights turn on according For a few seconds when the last door to the following modes: is closed. The timing stops automatically when the Will illuminate for a few seconds when doors are locked. the doors are unlocked. Vanity Mirror Lights — If Equipped Will illuminate for approximately three On the driver and passenger sun visor, 04136S0001EM minutes when one of the doors is opened. Overhead Console there is a light that illuminates the sun Will illuminate for a few seconds when visor mirror when the sun visor is folded 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch the doors are locked. down and the mirror cover is lifted. 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Timing is interrupted when the ignition is 3 — Overhead Lights Switch cycled to ON mode. 4 — Overhead Lights On/Off When Three Modes Are Available For Turning Doors Open Off Overhead Lighting: 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light Switch When all doors are closed after entering the vehicle, the three-minute 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a seconds timer will 7 — Center Reading/Map Light start for the interior lights. This timing 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light will stop when the ignition is cycled to ON mode. 0403132211US Lift For Sun Visor Mirror 41 The courtesy light turns on automatically Door Light Rear Overhead Light by lifting the cover. This vehicle is equipped with courtesy The rear overhead lights are activated or Glove Compartment Light door light that illuminate the entry for the deactivated by on/off switches located driver or passenger when the door is This light turns on automatically when the on the front overhead console or within opened, and turns off when it is closed. glove compartment is opened and turns the rear overhead lights themselves. off when it is closed. The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status. The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status.

04136S0004EM Rear Overhead Light 04136V0007EM Courtesy Door Light 1 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light 04136V0003EM 2 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Glove Compartment Light On vehicles equipped with a "Passive 3 — Left Side Rear Overhead Light Entry" system, another light can be found Interior Ambient Lighting Switch under each exterior door handle. The brightness of the interior passenger 4 — Right Side Rear Overhead Light compartment lights can be adjusted Switch through the Information and Entertainment System. The light turns on when a door is opened. To access the adjustment function, on the Note: The light will turn off main menu select the following items in automatically after a few minutes if a sequence: door is left open. To turn it on again, open 1. "Settings." another door or close and reopen the same door. 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting."

3. "Lights." 04136S0005EM The lights can be adjusted to seven Exterior Door Handle Light different levels of brightness. 42 Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights Instrument Panel Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS The luggage compartment features two With the daytime running lights or Windshield Wiper Stalk courtesy lights. headlights on, rotate the dimmer control These courtesy lights turn on upward to increase the instrument panel The windshield wiper stalk is located on automatically when the liftgate is opened brightness and the control button icons. the right side of the steering wheel. and turn off when it is closed. Rotate the dimmer control downward to The windshield wipers will only operate decrease brightness. with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. In cold weather, always turn off the wiper 04136V0006EM switch and allow the wipers to return to the Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights 04126V0055EM “Park” position before turning off the Dimmer Control The courtesy lights will turn on and off engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to regardless of the ignition position. the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle Note: If the liftgate is left open, the is restarted. lights will automatically turn off after 15 minutes to prevent discharging of the Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from battery. returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

43 Windshield Wiper/Washers Rain Sensors Rotating the switch to the position, Warning! activates the first, less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Rotating the switch to the position, Sudden loss of visibility through the activates the second, more sensitive windshield could lead to a collision. You level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more windshield during freezing weather, warm information on how this system the windshield with the defroster before and functions. during windshield washer use. Windshield Washer Operation

0403142699US Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Rain Sensor Windshield Wiper Stalk to operate the windshield washer. The Rain Sensor is located behind the Operation: The switch within the wiper Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the interior rear view mirror. This feature stalk can be set to the following windshield washer jet and the windshield senses moisture on the windshield and positions: wiper with a single movement. The wipers automatically activates the wipers for and washers will continue to operate until Windshield Wiper Off. the driver. stalk is released. Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. The windshield wiper stops working three

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. strokes after the stalk is released, Low Continuous Wiper Speed. followed by a final stroke six seconds High Continuous Wiper Speed. later to complete the cycle. Windshield Wiper Operation Mist Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather activates the first (low) level continuous conditions make occasional usage of the speed of the windshield wipers in manual wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward mode. to the MIST position and release for a Rotating the switch to the position single wiping cycle. This function is useful 04146V0002EM activates the second (high) level to remove small deposits of dust from Rain Sensor the windshield or morning dew. continuous speed of the windshield The feature is especially useful for road wipers in manual mode. Note: This function does not activate the splash or over spray from the windshield windshield washer. To spray windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. washer fluid onto the windshield, the washing function must be used. 44 The sensor has an adjustment range that The sensor continues to operate and it is HEADLAMP WASHERS varies progressively from wiper still (no possible to set the windshield wiper to stroke) when the windshield is dry, to continuous mode or . The failure The windshield wiper stalk operates the wiper at continuous speed (fast indication remains on for as long as the headlight washers when the ignition is in operation) with intense rain. sensor is active. the ON position and the headlights are turned on. The windshield wiper stalk is Activation The rain sensor is able to recognize and located on the right side of the steering automatically adjust itself in the Rotating the wiper switch to position column. To use the headlight washers, pull presence of the following conditions: or activates the rain sensor. the stalk toward you and release it. The The activation of the rain sensor system Presence of dirt on the controlled headlight washers will spray a timed is done by tapping the wiper stalk surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the upwards while the switch is in the or Presence of streaks of water caused position. windshield washers will spray the by the worn window wiper blades. windshield and the windshield wipers will The variation in sensitivity during rain cycle. sensor operation is also signaled by a Difference between day and night. Note: The headlight washers work on stroke of the wiper (command acquired Rear Window Wiper/Washer and implemented). This stroke is also every tenth wash cycle request. Shifting the vehicle into REVERSE with executed with the windshield dry. the windshield wiper operating, activates If the windshield washer is used with the a single cycle of the rear window wiper. rain sensor activated, the normal washing Activation of the rear window cycle is performed, after which the rain wiper/washer can be done by moving the sensor resumes its normal automatic stalk to one of the following positions: operation. Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area Pushing the stalk towards the clean. instrument panel activates the rear window washer (a brief push activates Deactivation one washing cycle, keeping the stalk Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition pushed washes continuously until the to STOP mode. stalk is released). In the event of malfunction of the rain Pushing the stalk downward sensor while it is active, the windshield activates/deactivates continuous rear wiper operates intermittently at a speed wiper operation. consistent with the sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, whether or not there is rain on the glass for as long as the sensor failure is indicated on the display. 45 CLIMATE CONTROL Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents Passenger Compartment Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster Side Air Vents Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction. To adjust the position of the Side Air Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster Adjuster (4) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear (2) in any direction. Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) Adjuster (4) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent. Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close down will close the vents. the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise will open the vent. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04156V0004EM 0313132161US Rear Air Vents Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 0313132160US 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster Side Air Vents 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 1 — Fixed Side Air Vents 3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

46 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Controls

04156V0005EM Automatic Climate Control System 1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — Knob If Equipped 2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 — Air Conditioning Button matic Operation) Selection Button 3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped 4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button ment Knob — If Equipped 5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 — Air Recirculation Button Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

47 Compressor variations (for A/C activation cooling/dehumidifying the air) Caution! Front Defroster Air recirculation Air recirculation The Climate Control System can also be The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which Rear Defroster does not pollute the environment in the operated manually by using the buttons event of accidental leakage. Under no and knobs on the faceplate. System deactivation circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, Manual selections will override the which are incompatible with the components automatic settings, which are stored until Operating Mode of this system. the AUTO button is pushed. If the system The Climate Control system can be intervenes for safety reasons, the activated in different ways. It is Description automatic setting will take control of the recommended to use the automatic system. The Automatic Dual Zone Climate function. Push the AUTO button and set Control System adjusts the temperature The below operations will not deactivate the desired temperatures. and air distribution independently the automatic (AUTO) function: The automatic system adjusts the between the driver and passenger. Air Recirculation activation/ temperature, quantity, and distribution The system maintains the set deactivation of air introduced into the passenger temperature inside the passenger compartment. It also controls air A/C activation/deactivation compartment and compensates for recirculation and the activation of the air outside temperature change. SYNC function activation conditioner. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Note: The reference temperature is 72 At any time during automatic operation, Rear Window Defrost activation/ you can change the temperature, activate °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort deactivation management. or deactivate the Rear Defroster, When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s activate SYNC, activate or deactivate The automatic setting will adjust the internal temperature is controlled the air conditioner, and activate or following to maintain comfort within the according to the set temperature. deactivate air recirculation. The system passenger compartment: The following can be manually set or will automatically adjust to the new Air temperature from the driver/front adjusted: settings. passenger side vents Driver/passenger air temperature Climate Control Display Settings Air distribution from the driver/front Blower speed (continuous variation) The Climate Control settings are visible passenger side vents on the Information and Entertainment Fan speed (continuous variation of the Air distribution (seven positions for System radio screen. air flow) driver and passenger)

48 The display on the Information and Rotate the passenger Temperature Air flow distributed between the Entertainment System is a pop up Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC floor vents (hotter air) and the window (1), which is activated by pushing function. This will set a new passenger the buttons or turning the knobs on the side temperature. central and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This air distribution Climate Control system. The indicator Rotate the Temperature Adjustment lights located on the buttons and knobs Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI setting is useful on sunny days indicate that the selected feature is (maximum heating) setting or fully during spring and autumn. on/off. If no operation is performed for a counterclockwise to engage the LO Air flow distributed between the predetermined time, the pop-up will close (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate floor vents, windshield, and front on the display. these functions, rotate the Temperature side window defrosting/demisting Adjustment Knob to the desired temperature. vents. This distribution setting warms the passenger compartment Rear passengers’ temperature is linked to driver side selection. while preventing the windows from fogging up. Air Distribution Selection In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls Push the Air Distribution Selection automatically manage the air button on the faceplate to change the distribution. When set manually, the mode of air distribution. The follow respective symbols on the Information selectable option are explained below: and Entertainment System indicate the air distribution setting. 0521128655US Air flow to the windshield and Climate Control Display Settings demister window vents to Fan Speed Adjustment 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display demist/defrost them. Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase Air flow at the central and side or decrease the blower speed. The speed is displayed with lighted indicators in the Air Temperature Adjustment dashboard vents to ventilate the Information and Entertainment System Rotate the driver or passenger chest and the face. display. Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise Air flow to the front and rear floor Maximum fan speed = all indicators for warmer temperatures or vents. This setting heats the counterclockwise for cooler illuminated on the Information and passenger compartment the temperatures. The set temperatures are Entertainment System display quickest. shown on the Information and Minimum fan speed = one indicator Entertainment System. illuminated on the Information and Push the SYNC button to sync the driver Entertainment System display and passenger air temperatures. 49 The fan can be turned off by rotating the This function makes temperature Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Blower Speed Knob clockwise to position regulation easier when the driver is Function — If Equipped O (all segments on the Information and traveling alone. When the automatic recirculation Entertainment System display are turned Turn the passenger Temperature function is selected, the AQS function off). Adjustment Knob or push the passenger automatically activates internal air Note: To restore automatic control of side Air Distribution Selection Button to recirculation when the outside air is the fan speed, push the AUTO button. change the passenger side air polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). temperature and return to separate air AUTO Button At low external temperatures or in high temperature management. humidity, the automatic function turns When the AUTO button is pushed Air Recirculation And Air Quality off to avoid fogging up the windows. The (indicator illuminated), the Climate System (AQS) user can select the function again by Control system automatically adjusts the pushing the Air Recirculation Button. following settings: Air Recirculation is managed according to In automatic operation, air recirculation the following operating mode: Quantity and distribution of air flow in will be controlled by the system the passenger compartment Automatic engagement: indicator is according to outside environmental illuminated above the “A”on the Air conditions. The air conditioner Recirculation Button Note: Air recirculation Forced activation (air circulation With the AQS function active and Cancels any manual settings always activated): indicator illuminated after the internal air recirculation

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE above the icon on the Air Selecting the AUTO function illuminates system has been functioning for a set Recirculation Button the indicator on the A/C button. amount of time, the Climate Control If air distribution or the fan speed is Forced deactivation (air recirculation System enables air intake to cycle the manual adjusted, the AUTO button always off with intake of outside air): air in the passenger compartment for a indicator will turn off to indicate that the both indicators not illuminated on the Air set time. The AQS function is disabled Climate Control system is no longer in Recirculation Button during the air changes. AUTO mode. The three operating conditions are The engagement of the recirculation After a manual adjustment, push the obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation system makes it possible to reach the AUTO button to resume the automatic Button in sequence. required heating or cooling conditions system. faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use SYNC Button it on rainy/cold days as it can increase the possibility of the windows fogging. Push the SYNC button (indicator When the outside temperature is low, illuminated) to sync the passenger side recirculation is forced off to prevent the air temperature with the driver side air windows from fogging up. temperature. 50 A/C Compressor Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Rear Defroster Function Push the A/C button or the icon to Push the Rear Defroster button to activate or deactivate the A/C Push the Front Defroster button activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear compressor (indicator illuminated when (indicator illuminated) to defrost the Defroster. activated). The A/C compressor will windshield and side windows. The Rear Defroster will turn off after remain off even after the engine has While in MAX-DEF function, the air 20 minutes or once the engine is turned stopped. conditioner will: off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push When the A/C compressor is turned off, the Rear Defroster button. Activate the air conditioner the system deactivates air recirculation compressor when the weather allows Note: To avoid damage, do not apply to prevent the windows from fogging up. stickers over the interior heating If the climate control system can Turn air recirculation off filaments of the Rear Defroster. maintain the temperature, with the A/C Set the maximum air temperature (HI) turned off, the AUTO feature will remain Humidity Sensor on both the driver and passenger side on and the AUTO button indicator light The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the will not switch off. Activate a blower speed based on the windows from fogging up. The AUTO To restore automatic control of the A/C temperature of the engine coolant function (indicator illuminated) must be compressor, push the A/C button or the Adjust the air flow towards the on for the Humidity Sensor to function. icon or the AUTO button. With the A/C windshield and front side windows When outside temperature is low, the compressor off, the air speed can be set system may turn the compressor on and manually using the Air Speed Adjustment Activate the Rear Window Defroster turn air recirculation off for safer driving. Knob. Display the fan speed (indicators Switching Off/On The Climate Control When the A/C compressor is on, and the illuminated) and current air distribution System engine is running, air speed cannot be setting lower than the minimum speed (only one Switching Off The Climate Control Note: The MAX-DEF function remains indicator light is lit). System active for approximately three minutes Note: When the A/C is off, the Climate once the engine coolant reaches the Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob Control system can not produce air that proper temperature. completely counterclockwise to turn off is colder than the current outside the Climate Control System. When the function is on, AUTO mode will temperature. Under certain deactivate. The only manual operations With the air conditioner off: environmental conditions, windows could possible are adjusting blower speed and fog up rapidly since the air is not Air recirculation is on turning off the Rear Window Defroster. dehumidified. The A/C compressor is off Pushing the button switches off the MAX-DEF function. The fan is off The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated 51 Note: The climate control system stores With Stop/Start system on, air flow is POWER WINDOWS the previously set temperatures and reduced to keep the compartment resumes operation when any button on comfort conditions for longer. Power Window Switches the system is pushed. Until the temperature drastically The power window switches work with Switching On The Climate Control changes within the cabin, the climate the ignition in the ON position and for System control system will continue to maintain three minutes after the ignition has been the temperature while the engine is off. placed in the STOP position. When one of To switch the climate control system on By deactivating the Stop/Start system the front doors is opened, this operation in automatic mode, push the AUTO with the button located on the is disabled. button. dashboard, the climate control system Driver Side Front Door Controls Stop/Start will take priority over the engine shutting off. The switches are located on the door The Stop/Start system shuts off the panel trim. All windows can be controlled engine when vehicle speed is 0 mph Note: from the driver side door panel. (0 km/h), and the climate control system will continue to maintain comfort within In harsh climate conditions, limit the the vehicle. use of the Stop/Start system to prevent the compressor from continuously Stop/Start will deactivate in the switching on and off. This will cause following scenarios: rapid misting of the windows and the The climate control system is in AUTO accumulation of humidity in the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE mode (indicator illuminated), and the passenger compartment. vehicle has yet to reach the set When the Stop/Start system is on, temperature the climate control system will always The climate control system is in LO take air in from outside, reducing the maximum cooling probability of the windows fogging up. 04166V0001EM Power Window Switches The climate control system is in HI System Maintenance maximum heating 1 — Front Left Window Switch In winter, the Climate Control System 2 — Front Right Window Switch The climate control system is in the must be turned on at least once a month 3 — Rear Right Window Switch MAX-DEF status for approximately ten minutes. 4 — Window Lockout Switch When the Stop/Start system is active, Have the system inspected at an 5 — Rear Left Window Switch the engine will restart if the inside authorized dealer before the summer. temperature changes significantly, or if the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is activated. 52 Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children on Push the buttons to open the desired Warning! window. board the vehicle. Each button has two position steps. The anti-pinch safety function is Press gently (first position step) for activated both during the manual and the Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, manual "burst" window travel, while automatic operation of the window. and do not let children play with power pressing the same button harder (second When the anti-pinch system is activated, windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to position step) activates "continuous the window closing is immediately children. Occupants, particularly unattended automatic" operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is children, can become entrapped by the If the button is pressed again, the window automatically reversed and the window windows while operating the power window will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in switches. Such entrapment may result in relation to the first stop position. The serious injury or death. Window Closing window cannot be operated during this Pull the window switch to the first detent time. to move the window upward. Pull the Note: In the event of an error, or if the window switch to the second detent, and anti-pinch protection is activated three the window will go up automatically. consecutive times, the automatic closing To Stop the window during Auto-UP operation of the window will be operation, push the window switch. deactivated. In order to restore the Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door correct operation of the system, the Controls window must be lowered. There are single window controls on the Power Window System Initialization passenger and rear door trim panels If power supply is interrupted, the which operate the door windows. electric window automatic operation Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch must be re-initialized. Protection - If Equipped To perform the initialization procedure, The vehicle may be equipped with an which must be done on each door with the anti-pinch safety device for closing the doors closed, manually fully close the windows. window to be initialized. If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the window’s movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

53 POWER SUNROOF — IF In a collision, there is a greater risk of EQUIPPED being thrown from a vehicle with an open Caution! sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured Power Sunroof or killed. Always fasten your seat belt The power sunroof consists of a single properly and make sure all passengers are Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or glass panel and is fitted with a power also properly secured. crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun sunshade the full length of the panel. Do not allow small children to operate the roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other damage it. Operation of the sunroof is only possible body parts, or any object, to project through with the ignition in ON mode. Refer to the sunroof opening. Injury may result. “Ignition System” in this chapter for Closing further information. Opening From the complete open position, push The sunroof has three preset positions: To open the sunroof’s front panel, push the open/close button toward the front the open/close button toward the rear of Fully closed. of the vehicle. The sunroof will close the vehicle to open to the comfort completely. Comfort (intermediate opening). position (half way). Pushing the button a The automatic motion can be interrupted second time will open to the fully open Fully open. in any position by pushing the open/close position. button again. Note: Youcannot have the sunshade The automatic motion can be interrupted closed when the sunroof is open. in any position by pushing the open/close Vent Opening button again. To bring the roof into vent position, push GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE and release the vent button. Warning! This type of vent opening can be activated regardless of the position of Never leave children unattended in a the sunroof. When starting with the roof vehicle, or with access to an unlocked in the closed position, pushing the vent vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near button automatically causes the sunroof the vehicle, or in a location accessible to to open to the vent position. If the roof is children. Do not leave the ignition of a already open, the button must be held vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the until the roof reaches the vent-opening ON mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped position. by the power sunroof while operating the 04186S0001EM Pushing the vent button again during power sunroof switch. Such entrapment Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons automatic movement of the roof will stop may result in serious injury or death. 1 — Power Shade Open/Close it. 2 — Sunroof Open/Close Button 3 — Vent Open/Close 54 Power Sun Shade 2. Cycle the ignition to STOP mode and HOOD wait at least ten seconds. The sunshade is power operated. Opening The Hood 3. Cycle the ignition to AVVmode. Refer Push the Power Shade open/close button To open the hood, proceed as follows: toward the rear of the vehicle to open the to “Ignition System” in this chapter for sun shade. further information. 1. Pull the release lever located on the driver’s side kick panel. Push the Power Shade open/close button 4. Hold the open/close button down for toward the front of the vehicle to close at least ten seconds. Youshould then the sun shade. hear the mechanical stop of the roof The automatic motion can be interrupted motor. in any position by pushing the Power Shade on/off button again. 5. Within five seconds, hold the open/close button down. The roof will Pinch Protect Feature perform a complete opening and closing The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety cycle (to indicate that the initialization system capable of detecting the procedure has been successful). If this presence of an obstacle during the does not occur, the procedure must be restarted from the beginning. closing movement. If an obstacle is 0403132207US detected, the system intervenes and the Hood Release Lever movement of the sunroof is immediately 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and reversed. position yourself in front of the grille. Initialization Procedure 3. Lift the hood slightly. Automatic operation of the sunroof must 4. Move the under-hood latch from right be initialized again in case of faulty to left to release the hood. sunroof operation. It may also be necessary to initialize the sunroof after the vehicle’s battery as been disconnected and then reconnected. Note: The anti-pinch safety device is deactivated during the initialization procedure. Proceed as follows: 1. Push the open/close button to bring the roof into the completely closed 0403132304US position. Hood Latch Location 55 5. Raise the hood completely. The POWER LIFTGATE operation is assisted by the addition of Warning! two gas props which hold it in the open Unlocking of the liftgate is electrically position. operated and is deactivated when the vehicle is in motion. Be sure the hood is fully latched before Note: driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate Use both hands to lift the hood. latched, it could open when the vehicle is in will automatically reverse to the closed Before lifting, check that the windshield motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or open position, provided it meets wiper arms are not raised from the injury or death. sufficient resistance. windshield or in operation. Also, ensure that the vehicle is stationary and that The liftgate height is adjustable to avoid the electric park brake is engaged. difficulties in tight spaces. To customize the liftgate opening position, proceed as Do not tamper with the props. follows: Assist the hood while lifting it. 1. Open the liftgate. Closing The Hood 2. Manually move the liftgate to the To close, lower the hood to desired position. approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from 3. Push one of the closing buttons for at the engine compartment then let it drop. least five seconds (successful GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Make sure that the hood is completely programming is indicated by the turn closed and fully latched. Do this by trying signals flashing three times). to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do The liftgate is now programmed to open not try to push the hood lid down, but to the set position. open it and repeat the procedure. This function can be selected on the Note: Always check that the hood is Information and Entertainment System. closed correctly to prevent it from opening while the vehicle is travelling. To set the liftgate opening height, refer Since the hood is equipped with a double to the Information and Entertainment locking system, one for each side, you System Owner’s Manual Supplement for must check that it is closed on each side. further information.

56 Opening Note: A signal will chime while the liftgate is opening or closing. Opening From The Outside Youcan stop the liftgate from moving by When unlocked, the liftgate can be pushing the interior liftgate release opened from outside the vehicle by button again. pushing the external liftgate release switch. Push the switch until you hear a “click.” The liftgate can also be opened by quickly pushing the external liftgate release button on the key fob twice. 0101132164US Manual Lock Release Location Pull to release the lock.

04206V0002EM Interior Liftgate Release 1 — Interior Liftgate Release Switch

Liftgate Emergency Opening 04056V0005EM External Liftgate Release Switch There is a panel on the luggage compartment interior trim, next to the The turn signal indicators will blink and liftgate lock, accessible by folding down the interior lights will turn on when the the rear seat backrest, which allows 0318134894US liftgate is opened. They turn off access to the manual lock release. Manual Lock Release Cord automatically when the liftgate is closed. The liftgate can now be opened manually. The lights turn off automatically after a Closing few minutes if the liftgate is left open. Closing From Outside Opening From The Inside It is possible to close the liftgate by When the liftgate is locked, it can be pushing: opened from inside the vehicle by lifting the interior liftgate release button on the The power liftgate switch. driver’s door panel trim. 57 The power lock switch located on the Customizing The Liftgate Opening 4. Move your foot under the bumper, liftgate (all the doors, including the Height simulating a kick. When you have liftgate, will be locked). completed this movement, withdraw your To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, you leg. To activate the liftgate, both sensors The liftgate button on the key fob can set the height at which the liftgate must detect your leg. twice. opens to. The Passive Entry liftgate switch on To customize the liftgate opening the liftgate. position, follow the steps below: 1. Open the liftgate manually and move it to the position that you want the liftgate to open to. 2. Press and hold one of the closing buttons for at least five seconds (successful acquisition is indicated by the turn signals flashing three times). 0101132146US The liftgate is now programmed to open Hands Free Liftgate Activation Zone to the set position. If it is closed, the Hands Free Liftgate 04056V0055EM Hands Free Liftgate — If Equipped unlocks and opens completely, and with Power Liftgate/Lock Switches

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE another movement of the foot, it stops. A 1 — Power Liftgate Switch To operate the Hands Free Liftgate further movement of the foot reverses System: 2 — Power Door Lock Switch the direction and closes the liftgate 1. If the doors are locked, the system completely, if you do not stop it again. must detect the electronic key near the If it is open, with a movement of the foot, Note: It is possible to stop the liftgate liftgate. the Hands Free Liftgate closes from moving with any of the Power completely, and with another movement Liftgate switches. 2. If the doors are unlocked, the system of the foot, it stops. If the liftgate is Closing From Inside does not have to detect the electronic stopped, another movement of the foot key near the liftgate. Push the power liftgate switch on the will reverse the direction and open it driver’s door panel trim and hold until the 3. Go to the rear of the vehicle, in the completely. operation is complete. center and about 3 feet (1 m) from the Note: It is possible to stop the liftgate liftgate. from moving by releasing the switch.

58 Note: To conserve the battery charge, To Use The Cargo Area Cover: avoid performing this operation Warning! repeatedly with the engine off. 1. From the rolled up (retracted) position, hold the handle and pull the Youcan activate/deactivate the Hands cover outward toward the rear of the Free Liftgate on the Information and During power operation, personal injury or vehicle. Entertainment System by pushing the cargo damage may occur. Ensure the MENU button to select the Main menu, liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the 2. Then assist the cover pins into the and selecting the following items: liftgate is closed and latched before driving slots located just inside the liftgate away. opening. 1. Settings

2. Doors And Locks Caution! 3. Automatic Liftgate Opening Select them by turning the Rotary Pad and The Hands-Free Liftgate can be turned off pushing it. manually in the Information and Entertainment System to avoid unintentional activation. For further information refer to the Information and Warning! Entertainment System Owner’s Manual Supplement. Driving with the liftgate open can allow 04206V0016EM poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. Liftgate Initialization Retractable Cargo Area Cover Youand your passengers could be injured by Note: Automatic operation of the 1 — Handle these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. liftgate must be initialized again in case 2 — Cover Pins of faulty liftgate operation. Proceed as If you are required to drive with the follows: liftgate open, make sure that all windows Removing The Cover: are closed, and the climate control blower 1. Close all the doors and the liftgate. switch is set at high speed. Do not use the 1. Retract the cover by pulling the recirculation mode. 2. Push the lock button on the key fob. handle slightly rearward to release the cover pins. 3. Push the unlock button on the key fob. 2. Guide the cover forward until it is fully Cargo Area Features retracted. Retractable Cargo Area Cover The Retractable Cargo Area Cover can be rolled up and removed. 59 3. Pull the two cover hooks (one on each Lift up the load floor by the handle. Grocery Hooks side) towards the inside of the cargo Two hooks (one on the left side and one area. Then lift the cover up and remove it. on the right side) are also available on the side panels to fix loads that are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags).

0403132214US Load Floor 04206V0017EM Cover Attached Cargo Area Anchors The cargo area floor may be equipped 3 — Cover Hook 04206V0009EM with fixed or mobile anchoring loops that Grocery Hook allows you to anchor and secure luggage safely. Note: Do not apply a load greater than The fixed anchor loops are located in the 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Warning! four corners of the cargo floor.

In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.

To Access The Tire Service Kit To access the "Tire Service Kit" (for its 0403132215US use, refer to "In Case Of Emergency"), Anchor Loops proceed as follows:

60 Cargo Area Adjustable Rail — If Lift the loop to fasten the load. INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Equipped Glove Compartment The mobile loops (if equipped), slide on two guides secured to the cargo area To open the glove compartment proceed floor. as follows: To position a loop, push down the center 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the button while sliding the loop along the glove compartment by placing the guide to the desired position. Release the emergency key into the lock on the button and move the loop slightly to the handle. next fixed position in the notches on the guide. 2. Pull the handle to open the glove compartment. 0403132216US Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop To Use Cargo Net — If Equipped Cargo nets can be used to contain lightweight materials during transport. The cargo net is included in the optional “Convenience Package” and also available from your authorized dealer.

0403132217US Adjustable Anchor Loop — If Equipped 0403132212US Opening The Glove Compartment When the glove compartment is opened, a light turns on to illuminate the inside of the compartment. Note: Do not insert large objects that prevent the glove compartment from closing completely. Always make sure that the glove compartment is completely closed when driving.

61 Sun Visors Homelink The following operation will delete the manufacture’s standard codes and does The sun visors are located at the sides of Description the interior rear view mirror. They can be not need to be repeated during the Homelink is a fixed system installed on adjusted forward and sideways. subsequent button programming: the vehicle. It can sync up to three To direct the visor toward the passenger different devices that activate garage Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and side window, detach the visor from the doors, gates, lighting systems, and home 3). After about ten seconds, the lighted interior rear view mirror side hook and or office alarm systems. indicators will start to flash. Release both turn it towards the side window. buttons. From this position, the sun visor can also Programming be extended toward the rear of the vehicle for additional blockage of sunlight. Warning! Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back of the sun visors and can be Vehicle exhaust contains carbon used even in poor light conditions. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the 04246S0006NA GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE universal transceiver. Do not program the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) transceiver if people, pets or other objects Buttons are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 — Homelink Button 1 this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as 2 — Homelink Button 2 required by Federal safety standards. This 3 — Homelink Button 3 includes most garage door opener models 4 — Homelink Indicator 0403132210US manufactured after 1982. Do not use a Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger garage door opener without these safety Window features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Note: Follow the steps below to begin Note: A rear facing child restraint on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety programming your remote control to one system should never be fitted in the front information or assistance. of the HomeLink buttons: passenger seat. Always comply with the 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink instructions on the sun visor. Refer to Note: Without starting the engine, button (1, 2 or 3). "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more activate the electric park brake and place information. the ignition in the ON position. 62 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins Alternative Code Synchronization Note: To program Homelink using an to flash slowly, move the portable remote To check whether the garage door or gate Alternative Code, the vehicle must be control one to three inches from the motor has an alternative code, proceed within range of the garage door. Activate HomeLink system (keeping the as follows: the electric park brake and turn the programmable button pushed down). 1. Read the garage door or gate motor ignition to ON, without starting the If the indicator does not begin to flash manufacturer manual. engine. quickly, change the distance between the 2. The portable remote control seems to Proceed as follows: HomeLink and the portable remote have programmed to the HomeLink 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on control and try the procedure again. system, but the garage door or gate can the garage door or gate motor. The color 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first be neither opened or closed. and position may vary depending on the slowly and then quickly. When the 3. Push the programmed button and manufacturer (consult the garage door or indicator starts to flash quickly, release keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” both buttons. alternative code system, the indicator button (this normally activates the flashes briefly, and then remains off for setting warning light). Using The Homelink System two seconds. This sequence is repeated 2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1, The HomeLink system activates the for 20 seconds. 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator garage door or gate motor, just like the begins to flash slowly, move the portable portable remote control. The vehicle Warning! remote control one to three inches from must be within the range of the garage the HomeLink system (keeping the door and the ignition must be in the ON Vehicle exhaust contains carbon programmable button pushed down). position. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). vehicle in the garage while programming the 3. Within 30 seconds, push the While the signal is being transmitted, the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. indicator is lit and the system (garage injury or death. Push the programmed button a second door, gate, etc.) will respond. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and time and release it to conclude the If the HomeLink system does not close while you are programming the operation. For some motors, the universal transceiver. Do not program the operate, the original portable remote operation will probably have to be transceiver if people, pets or other objects repeated a third time to end the setting. control may be equipped with an are in the path of the door or gate. Only use alternative code (refer to “Alternative this transceiver with a garage door opener The motor should now be capable of Code Synchronization”). that has a “stop and reverse” feature as recognizing the signal transmitted by If necessary, the original remote control required by Federal safety standards. This HomeLink and then open/close the door can still be used to operate the system. includes most garage door opener models or gate. manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. 63 Programming A Single Key 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins Technical Information For After Sales It is possible to program another original to flash slowly, move the portable remote Service remote control on an already control 1 to 3 inches from the system If you are unable to set up HomeLink programmed HomeLink key by canceling (keeping the programmable button successfully after following the above the previously stored frequency. pressed down). instructions, contact After Sales Service If the indicator does not begin to flash (HomeLink free hotline number quickly, change the distance between the 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following Warning! HomeLink and the portable remote information: control and try the procedure again. Vehicle make and model, including Vehicle exhaust contains carbon The HomeLink indicator flashes, first manufacturing year and country of monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your slowly and then quickly. When the purchase; vehicle in the garage while programming the indicator starts to flash quickly, release transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious Make, model, age and frequency of use injury or death. both buttons on the remote control. of the original portable remote control (if known). Yourmotorized door or gate will open and The system previously programmed to close while you are programming the HomeLink has now been deleted and the General Information new system is ready to use. This does not universal transceiver. Do not program the The following regulatory statement affect the other two HomeLink buttons in transceiver if people, pets or other objects applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) are in the path of the door or gate. Only use any way. this transceiver with a garage door opener devices equipped in this vehicle: that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Deleting Programmed Keys This device complies with Part 15 of the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE required by Federal safety standards. This It is recommended to delete HomeLink FCC Rules and with Industry Canada includes most garage door opener models programming before selling the vehicle. license-exempt RSS standard(s). manufactured after 1982. Do not use a All three keys are deleted Operation is subject to the following two garage door opener without these safety conditions: features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, simultaneously. on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety Proceed as follows: 1. This device may not cause harmful information or assistance. 1. Push and hold the outer buttons interference, and (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the 2. This device must accept any Note: Activate the electric park brake indicator will start to flash. interference received, including and place the ignition to ON without 2. Release both keys. interference that may cause undesired starting the engine. operation. Proceed as follows: Note: Changes or modifications not 1. Push the desired HomeLink button expressly approved by the party and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not responsible for compliance could void the release the button until the last user’s authority to operate the operation has been performed. equipment. 64 Power Outlets The Instrument Panel Power Outlet is Warning! located under the air conditioning control panel. It will only operate when the ignition is ON. Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.

Cupholder

04206V0010EM Two cupholders are available in the Luggage Compartment Power Outlet center console. Front Armrest The center console storage compartment is located between the front seats. 0313132162US To access the center console storage, lift Instrument Panel Power Outlet the upper part of the center console as Note: Do not connect devices, with a shown below. power rating higher than 180 W, to the outlet. Do not use power adaptors that do not fit the outlet as this may damage it. 0403132213US Luggage Compartment Power Outlet Cupholders In Center Console The Luggage Compartment Power Outlet To access the cupholders, slide the cover is located on the left side of the luggage forward. To close the compartment, push compartment and only works with the the cover and it will close automatically. ignition device in the ON position. Note: Do not connect devices with powers higher than 150 W to the socket. 0403132209US Do not damage the outlet by using Center Console unsuitable adaptors.

65 Rear Armrest The rear armrest is foldable and can be stored in the backrest. To lower the armrest, pull on the tab located at the top of the seatback and fold it downward. To re-close the armrest, lift it until it is inserted into the backrest. There are two cupholders and a phone compartment inside the armrest. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

04246V0018EM Rear Cupholder Note: The armrest was not designed to support the weight of an adult passenger or a child. Only use it to hold drinks or small objects.

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .68 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .70 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL...... 75 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .98 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ...... 98

67 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster

05026S0004NAQV Instrument Cluster GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

68 Instrument Cluster Descriptions 5. Speedometer 1. Tachometer Caution! Indicates vehicle speed. Indicates the engine speed in Note: The hard telltales will illuminate revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). Driving with a hot engine cooling system for a bulb check when the ignition is first could damage your vehicle. If the cycled. Inside the tachometer there is a light temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and sensor capable of detecting ambient light stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditions and adjusting the operating conditioner turned off until the pointer drops mode (night/day) and the brightness of back into the normal range. If the pointer the instrument panel and the Information remains on the “H”, turn the engine off and Entertainment System display. immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. 2. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge The digital bar indicator monitors the 3. Instrument Cluster Display temperature of the engine oil and starts supplying indications when the fluid The instrument cluster display temperature reaches approximately features a driver-interactive display. 122°F (50°C). Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” Under normal usage, the digital scale for further information. should hover around the middle of the scale according to the working 4. Fuel Gauge conditions. The digital bar gauge shows the amount of fuel in the tank. Warning! The warning light turns on, a message is displayed and there is an acoustic signal when about 2.4 gallons A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. (9 liters) of fuel are left in the tank. Youor others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. Youmay want to The fuel pump symbol points to the call an authorized dealer for service if your side of the vehicle where the fuel door is vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under located. the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Note: If the low fuel warning light Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. switches on, refuel at the earliest opportunity. 69 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0001QV Instrument Cluster Display

70 Reconfigurable Display Items 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Depending on the driving mode chosen using the Alfa DNA Pro (Dynamic, Natural, 1. Headlight Warning Lights Shows information regarding the Speed Limiter function. Advanced Efficiency and RACE), the Displays the headlight warning light for screens can be graphically different. either of the following active modes: 5. Compass Navigation instructions and call information can be set and displayed in Headlights 6. Reconfigurable Main Area the Information and Entertainment Automatic Headlights Can display the following screens: System.

2. Gear Selector Information Home Home Displays the following information Trip A The parameters shown on the display for controlled by the gear selector function: Trip B (can be activated/deactivated the Dynamic, Natural and Advanced Efficiency modes are: P = PARK through the Information and Entertainment System) Time R = REVERSE Performance Outside Temperature N = NEUTRAL The screens can be selected, on rotation, Current Speed (shown if the repeat D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed) by pushing the MENU selection button on modes of the Phone and Navigation AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in the windshield wiper stalk. functions are not active) manual (sequential) driving mode – Range shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode

3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Cruise Control Displays operations for the following modes: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 05036V0002EM Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise MENU Selection Button Control (ACC) (if equipped) 05036S0004NA Instrument Cluster Display

71 Trip A And B To reset the values, push and hold down the MENU button on the windshield wiper For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, stalk. Advanced Efficiency, and RACE) with the ignition device ON, the "Trip computer" can be used to display the measurements regarding the operating state of the vehicle. This function is characterized by two separate records, called “Trip A”and “Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by Information and Entertainment System), 0401144046US where the “complete missions” (journeys) Instrument Cluster Display are recorded in a reciprocally In RACE mode, the consumption independent manner. indication index is not active and a sports “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display 05036V0002EM gearshift indicator is displayed. The the values relating to: Reset Button sports gearshift indicator is represented Performance by three yellow segments; if the third Distance travelled indicator, characterized by the word Average fuel consumption The displayed parameters differ "SHIFT,” is on, it means that the gear according to the active mode. The modes should be shifted. Average speed which can be selected using the Alfa DNA Active trip Pro system are: Fuel consumption indicator Natural GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0005NA Race Mode

05036S0007NA 05036S0009NA Instrument Cluster Display Efficiency Consumption Graph 72 The screen graphically reproduces some The displayed parameters are related to parameters closely linked to the vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the efficiency of the driving style, with a view trend of the longitudinal/lateral to limiting consumption. accelerations (G-meter information), considering gravity acceleration as a Advanced Efficiency reference unit. Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. 7. Vehicle Range

05036S0013NA Indicates the miles left before the fuel Acceleration Gauge tank is empty. The displayed parameters are related to Displays the position by indicating the vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the cardinal direction. trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), 8. Failure Warning Lights 05036S0011NA Dynamic Driving Style considering gravity acceleration as a Area dedicated to displaying failures, the reference unit. following symbols could be displayed on The three central icons on the screen rotation: indicate the effectiveness of the driving Lateral acceleration peaks are also style, linked to the following parameters: indicated. Low criticality symbols (yellow amber) acceleration, deceleration and gear RACE High criticality symbols (red) shifts, with a view to limiting consumption. The bar below the icons 9. Odometer shows current consumption and the Indicates the total miles traveled. green line represents the optimal area. The globe lights up gradually according to U.S. Federal regulations require that lower consumption. upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct Dynamic mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he 05036S0014NA Acceleration Stability Gauge cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed 73 in the door jamb stating what the mileage Select “Settings” from he main menu Language: change the language of the was before the repair or service. It is a using the Rotary Knob. system good idea for you to make a record of the Restore Settings: restores the factory odometer reading before the settings repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door To access and the change the setting, jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer turn and push the Rotary Pad. must be reset at zero. Clock & Date Customer Programmable Settings

05036S0040EM MENU button Units & Language

05036S0015EM Information and Entertainment System 0501142760US Clock & Date Selectable Menu Options Multiple settings can be programmed by The following settings can be modified the user using the Information and under the “Clock & Date” menu: Entertainment System. This section describes only the basic settings: Sync With GPS Time: activates or deactivates the clock synchronization Units & Language through the GPS. If the function is 0401135760US Time & Date Units & Language Selectable Menu deactivated, the options Set Time and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Set Date are enabled Cluster Options To access the settings list in the The following settings can be modified Set Time: set the time manually Information and Entertainment System, under the “Units & Language” menu: Time Format: set the time format to proceed as follows: Measure Units: select US, metric, or either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock) Push the MENU button to access the custom. The custom option allows for Set Date: set the date manually main menu. individual selection of the unit measures Restore Settings: restores the factory settings 74 To access and the change the setting, WARNING LIGHTS AND The failure indicators appearing on turn and push the Rotary Pad. MESSAGES ON THE the display are divided into two Cluster INSTRUMENT PANEL categories: very serious and less serious faults. Serious faults are indicated by a The following pages consist of warning repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” lights and messages. Less serious faults are indicated by a Note: warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. Youcan stop the warning cycle in both The warning light turns on together cases by pushing the button located on with a dedicated message and/or chime the windshield wiper stalk. The when applicable. These indications are instrument panel warning light will stay precautionary and as such must not be on until the cause of the failure is considered as exhaustive and/or eliminated. alternative to the information contained

0401135762US in the Owner’s Manual, which you are Instrument Cluster Display Selectable advised to read carefully in all cases. Menu Options Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure The following settings can be modified indication. under the “Cluster” menu: Warning Buzzer Volume: set the volume of the warning buzzer Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip function Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate repeating the Phone function screens on the instrument cluster display Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and the change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.

75 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by ON turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the This light monitors various brake functions, including ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the approximately four seconds. The light should then turn brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. inspected by an authorized dealer. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been The light also will turn on when the parking brake is disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the does not show the degree of brake application. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. have the system checked as soon as possible. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has Release the electric park brake, then check that the been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake warning light has turned off. Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately. either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

76 Warning Light What It Means What To Do AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. 77 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not possible. on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have guaranteed. the tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

78 Each tire, including the spare (if Please note that the TPMS is not a properly. Always check the TPMS provided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance, malfunction telltale after replacing one when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if ensure that the replacement or alternate manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the level tires and wheels allow the TPMS to tire inflation pressure label. (If your to trigger illumination of the TPMS low continue to function properly. vehicle has tires of a different size than tire pressure telltale. the size indicated on the vehicle placard Yourvehicle has also been equipped with Caution! or tire inflation pressure label, you should a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate determine the proper tire inflation when the system is not operating pressure for those tires.) properly. The TPMS malfunction The TPMS has been optimized for the As an added safety feature, your vehicle indicator is combined with the low tire original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS has been equipped with a Tire Pressure pressure telltale. When the system pressures and warning have been Monitoring System (TPMS) that detects a malfunction, the telltale will established for the tire size equipped on illuminates a low tire pressure telltale flash for approximately one minute and your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using when one or more of your tires is then remain continuously illuminated. replacement equipment that is not of the significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, This sequence will continue upon same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket when the low tire pressure telltale subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as wheels can cause sensor damage. Using illuminates, you should stop and check the malfunction exists. When the aftermarket tire sealants may cause the your tires as soon as possible and inflate malfunction indicator is illuminated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) them to the proper pressure. Driving on a system may not be able to detect or sensor to become inoperable. After using an significantly under-inflated tire causes signal low tire pressure as intended. aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended the tire to overheat and can lead to tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a that you take your vehicle to an authorized failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel variety of reasons, including the dealership to have your sensor function checked. efficiency and tire tread life, and may installation of replacement or alternate affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping tires or wheels on the vehicle that ability. prevent the TPMS from functioning

79 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there. duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

80 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

81 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) Refuel the vehicle. illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

82 Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position. LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed. RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

83 Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Warning Light What It Means What To Do LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System.

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer. 84 Warning Light What It Means What To Do In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, shut off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top ENGINE TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT offwith coolant and check that the level is between the This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the the telltale comes on when the engine is started again. temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in will be sound for four minutes or until the engine is high-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale allowed to cool whichever comes first. stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. POWER STEERING FAILURE If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. Note: Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the other, and then turn in back to the central position. DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not Close all the doors properly. completely shut. An chime will signal when the doors is open and the vehicle is moving.

85 Warning Light What It Means What To Do HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open Fully close the hood. hood appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is moving. LIFTGATE OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the liftgate is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the liftgate. open liftgate appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is moving.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

86 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS Place the gear selector in the park position and turn the This telltale, along with the related message, signals a vehicle off: the telltale should switch off. Start the failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC). vehicle. If the telltale remains solid (the telltale does not If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the flash) with engine running, the vehicle can still be driven engine is running. until proper maintenance can be performed. If the telltale If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate flashes with the engine running, do not drive the vehicle. intervention is required. A loss of performance, Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take the failure eliminated. place and the vehicle may need to be towed. LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum recommended value. Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. OIL OVER MAXIMUM LEVEL Run the engine under 3000 RPM during this time. The telltale turns on, along with the respective message on the instrument cluster display, to indicate that the engine oil level is too high.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The illumination of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. corresponds to an alternator failure.

BRAKE DISC TEMPERATURE Avoid aggressive brake maneuvers, hovering over the When the telltale illuminates, it indicates an excessive brake pedal, and reduce vehicle speed to allow brake temperature of the brake discs. systems to cool down.

87 Amber Symbols

Warning Lights What It Means What To Do ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system. Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.

88 Warning Lights What It Means What To Do ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.

89 Warning Light What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

STOP/START SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.

90 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM INDICATOR The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the lane departure alarm function is not enabled.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Lane Departure Warning system.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights.

91 Warning Light What It Means What To Do AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling. case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.

92 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect anomalies with factory parts.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED Note: This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake Always use Alfa Romeo genuine parts or similar — the discs have reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) is best able to detect anomalies with factory parts.

Warning!

It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer. dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.

93 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. Contact an authorized dealer. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE This telltale will illuminate along with an accompanying Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have message when the AWD dynamic control system is the failure eliminated. temporarily deactivated to prevent damage. The traction system will work in RWD mode in this instance. TEMPORARY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce the load This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the AWD to allow the system to cool down. The AWD system will dynamic control system is temporarily deactivated to resume normal operation when the symbol disappears prevent damage. The traction system will work in RWD from the display. mode in this instance.

ABS ACTIVATION This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the ABS system has activated.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION SELECTION — IF EQUIPPED GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION — IF EQUIPPED While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.

94 Warning Light What It Means What To Do To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. in “Technical Specifications.” Check that the trailer light is correctly connected to the TRAILER LIGHT CONTROL UNIT FAILURE socket. If the fault persists the next time you start the The telltale illuminates to indicate that there has been a engine, contact an authorized dealer to have the system failure in the control unit that manages the trailer lights. checked.

LIFTGATE ELECTRIC OPENING/CLOSING FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale illuminates to indicate a liftgate electric the failure eliminated. opening/closing system failure.

95 Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

STOP/START SYSTEM OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Stop/Start system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) SYSTEM The telltale illuminates when the HDC system intervenes. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

96 Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

97 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system. components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration. service technicians may need to access For states that require It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak an Inspection and diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the “Warning Lights And Messages” “Malfunction Indicator paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on The aim of the OBD system (Onboard when the engine is running, and that the Diagnostic) is to: OBD II system is ready for testing. ONLYan authorized service technician Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, The OBD II system may not be ready if Indicate an increase in emissions diagnose, or service your vehicle. your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery Indicate the need to replace damaged If unauthorized equipment is connected to replacement. If the OBD II system should components the OBD II connection port, such as a be determined not ready for the I/M test, driver-behavior tracking device, it may: The vehicle also has a connector, which your vehicle may fail the test. can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, Yourvehicle has a simple ignition makes it possible to read the error codes including safety related systems, could be actuated test, which you can use prior to stored in the electronic control units impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident going to the test station. To check if your together with a series of specific involving serious injury or death. vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you parameters for engine operation and must do the following: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL diagnosis. This check can be carried out Access, or allow others to access, by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems, 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON including personal information. position, but do not crank or start the Note: After eliminating a fault, to check engine. the system completely, your authorized dealer is obliged to run tests and, if Note: If you crank or start the engine, necessary certain road tests. you will have to start this test over.

98 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition Regardless of whether your vehicle's switch to the ON position, you will see the OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” illuminated during normal vehicle symbol come on as part of a normal bulb operation you should have your vehicle check. serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one because the MIL is on with the engine of two things will happen: running. The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

99 This page is intentionally left blank

100 SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 102 the safety systems that your vehicle is AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . .105 equipped with, and provides instructions OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .114 on how to use them correctly. SAFETYTIPS ...... 140

101 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The system also improves control and The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws The vehicle may be equipped with the stability of the vehicle when braking on a of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor following active safety devices: surface where the grip of the left and can it increase braking or steering efficiency right wheels varies, such as in a corner. beyond that afforded by the condition of the Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

SAFETY The Electronic Braking Force Distribution afforded. Drive Train Control (DTC) System (EBD) system works with the ABS, allowing the brake force to be distributed The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) between the front and rear wheels. including those resulting from excessive System speed in turns, following another vehicle too System Intervention Traction Control System (TCS) closely, or hydroplaning. The ABS equipped on this vehicle is The capabilities of an ABS equipped Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System provided with the "Brake-By-Wire" vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless Hill Start Assist (HSA) System (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. or dangerous manner that could jeopardize With this system, the command given by the user’s safety or the safety of others. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) pressing the brake pedal is not System transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Drive Train Control (DTC) System Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) System Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the pedal with the traditional system Some models of this vehicle are equipped For system operation, see the following is no longer noticeable. with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD), pages. which offers an optimal drive for countless driving conditions and road Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Warning! surfaces. The system reduces tire An integral part of the braking system, slipping to a minimum, automatically the ABS prevents one or more wheels redistributing the torque to the front and from locking and slipping in all road The ABS contains sophisticated rear wheels as needed. surface conditions, regardless of the electronic equipment that may be To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with intensity of the braking action. The susceptible to interference caused by AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel system ensures that the vehicle can be improperly installed or high output radio drive (RWD) when the road and controlled even during emergency transmitting equipment. This interference environmental conditions are such that braking, allowing the driver to optimize can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. stopping distances. capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified When the road and environmental The system intervenes during braking professionals. conditions require better traction, the when the wheels are about to lock, vehicle automatically switches to AWD typically in emergency braking or Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to mode. low-grip conditions where locking may be a collision. Pumping makes the stopping more frequent. distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. 102 Note: Understeer occurs when the vehicle is Vehicle modifications, or failure to There may be a brief delay in shifting turning less than it should according to properly maintain your vehicle, may change to AWD mode after a tire slipping event the angle of the steering wheel. the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance occurs. System Intervention of the ESC system. Changes to the steering If the system failure symbol switches The intervention of the system is system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely on, after starting the engine or while indicated by the flashing of the ESC driving, it means that the AWD system is affect ESC performance. Improperly warning light on the instrument panel, to inflated and unevenly worn tires may also not working properly. If the warning inform the driver that the vehicle degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle message activates frequently, it is stability and grip are critical. modification or poor vehicle maintenance recommended to carry out the that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC maintenance operations. system can increase the risk of loss of Warning! vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal Electronic Stability Control (ESC) injury and death. System The ESC system improves the directional Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot Traction Control System (TCS) control and stability of the vehicle in prevent the natural laws of physics from various driving conditions. acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the The system automatically operates in the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on understeer and oversteer, distributing including those resulting from excessive one or both drive wheels on roads that the brake force on the appropriate speed in turns, driving on very slippery are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending wheels. The torque supplied by the surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot on the slipping conditions, two different engine can also be reduced in order to prevent accidents resulting from loss of control systems are activated: maintain control of the vehicle. vehicle control due to inappropriate driver The ESC system uses sensors installed input for the conditions. Only a safe, If the slipping involves both drive on the vehicle to determine the path that attentive, and skillful driver can prevent wheels, the system intervenes, reducing accidents. The capabilities of an ESC the power transmitted by the engine. the driver intends to follow and equipped vehicle must never be exploited in compares it with the vehicle’s effective a reckless or dangerous manner which could If the slipping only involves one of the path. When the real path deviates from jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of drive wheels, the Brake Limited the desired path, the ESC system others. Differential (BLD) function is activated, intervenes to counter the vehicle’s automatically braking the wheel which is understeer or oversteer. slipping (the behavior of a self-locking Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is differential is simulated). This will turning more than it should according to increase the engine torque transferred to the angle of the steering wheel. the wheel which isn't slipping. 103 System Intervention When starting from a stop, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking The intervention of the system is Warning! indicated by the flashing of the ESC pressure on the wheels until the engine warning light on the instrument panel, to torque necessary for starting is reached, The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent or in any case for a maximum of two

SAFETY inform the driver that the vehicle stability and grip are critical. the natural laws of physics from acting on seconds, allowing your right foot to be the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction moved easily from the brake pedal to the Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA accelerator. The PBA system is designed to improve cannot prevent collisions, including those The system will automatically deactivate resulting from excessive speed in turns, the vehicle’s braking capacity during after two seconds without starting, emergency braking. driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a gradually releasing the braking pressure. The system detects emergency braking PBA-equipped vehicle must never be During this release stage, it is possible to by monitoring the speed and force with exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, hear a typical mechanical brake release which the brake pedal is pressed, and which could jeopardize the user's safety or noise, indicating the imminent movement consequently applies the optimal brake the safety of others. of the vehicle. pressure. This can reduce the braking distance: the PBA system therefore Hill Start Assist (HSA) System complements the ABS. Warning! This is an integral part of the ESC system Maximum assistance from the PBA that facilitates starting on slopes, system is obtained by pressing the brake activating automatically in the following There may be situations where the Hill Start pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake cases: pedal should be pressed continuously Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or during braking, avoiding intermittent Uphill: the vehicle is stationary on a with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a presses, to get the most out of the road with a gradient higher than 5%, the trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active system. Do not reduce pressure on the engine is running, the brake is pressed, driving involvement. It is always the driver’s brake pedal until braking is no longer and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) responsibility to be attentive to distance to necessary. or a gear other than REVERSE (R) is other vehicles, people, and objects, and most The PBA system is deactivated when the engaged. importantly brake operation to ensure safe brake pedal is released. operation of the vehicle under all road Downhill: the vehicle is stationary on a conditions. Yourcomplete attention is road with a gradient higher than 5%, the always required while driving to maintain engine is running, the brake is pressed, safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow and the transmission is in REVERSE (R). these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

104 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The DST function uses the integration of The dynamic drive control is used to The following auxiliary driving systems the ESC system with the electric power optimize and balance the drive torque are available in this vehicle: steering to increase the safety level of between the wheels of the same axles. the whole vehicle. The ATVsystem improves the grip in Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) In critical situations for example (braking turns, sending more drive torque to the Forward Collision Warning Plus on surfaces with different grip external wheel. (FCW+) conditions), the ESC system influences Given that, in a turn, the external wheels the steering through the DST function to of the car travel more than the internal Tire Pressure Monitoring System implement an additional torque ones and therefore turn faster, sending a (TPMS) contribution on the steering wheel in higher thrust to the external rear wheel Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System order to suggest the most correct allows for the car to be more stable and maneuver to the driver. to not suffer an "understeer" condition. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system The coordinated action of the brakes and Understeer occurs when the vehicle is uses two radar sensors, located in the steering increases the safety and control turning less than appropriate for the rear bumper (one on each side), to detect of the vehicle. steering wheel position. the presence of other vehicles in the rear side blind spots of your vehicle. Note: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle.

0403132303US Rear Sensor Location

105 The system warns the driver about the This area begins from the door mirror and presence of other vehicles in the extends for approximately 19 feet (6 m) Warning! detection area by illuminating the toward the rear part of the vehicle. warning light located within the door When the sensors are active, the system mirror on the side in which the other The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an

SAFETY monitors the detection areas on both vehicle was detected. If equipped, an sides of the vehicle and warns the driver aid to help detect objects in the blind spot audible chime will also be heard to alert about the possible presence of vehicles zones. The BSM system is not designed to the driver (if option is selected within the in these areas. detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Information and Entertainment System). Even if your vehicle is equipped with the While driving, the system monitors the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s detection area from three different input mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use points (side, rear and front) to check your turn signal before changing lanes. whether an alert needs to be sent to the Failure to do so can result in serious injury or driver. The system can detect the death. presence of a vehicle in one of these three areas. Note: Note: For the system to operate properly, The system does not alert the driver the rear bumper area where the radar of the presence of fixed objects (e.g. sensors are located must stay free from safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). snow, ice and dirt gathered from the 0434132127US road surface. BSM Indicator Light However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of Do not cover the rear bumper area When the engine is started, the warning these objects. This is normal and does where the radar sensors are located with light illuminates briefly to signal the not indicate a system malfunction. any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, driver that the system is active. The system does not alert the driver etc.). Sensors about the presence of vehicles coming If you wish to install a rear tow eye The sensors are activated when any from the opposite direction, in the after purchasing the vehicle, you will forward gear is engaged at a speed adjacent lanes. need to deactivate the system via the higher than approximately 6 mph Information and Entertainment System. (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged. To access the function, select the The sensors are temporarily deactivated following items in sequence on the main when the vehicle is stationary or the menu: vehicle is in PARK (P). 1. “Settings.” The detection area of the system covers approximately a lane on both sides of the 2. “Safety.” vehicle which is around 9 feet (3 m). 106 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” Note: If the sensors are covered by The visual warning on the mirror will blink objects or vehicles, the system may not if the driver activates the turn signals, Rear View work as intended. thus indicating the intention to change The system detects vehicles coming from lane. the rear part of your vehicle on both sides The warning light will be constant if the and entering the rear detection area with Warning! driver stays in the same lane. a difference in speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h) in relation to your vehicle. "Blind Spot Alert" Function Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a Deactivation Overtaking Vehicles back up aid system. It is intended to be used When the system is deactivated ("Blind If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP with a difference in speed of less than in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be systems will not emit neither an acoustic approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) and the careful when backing up, even when using RCP.Always check carefully behind your nor visual warning. vehicle stays in the blind spot for vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check The BSM system will store the operating approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, mode that was active when the engine light on the door mirror of the obstructions, and blind spots before backing was stopped. Each time the engine is corresponding side illuminates. up. Failure to do so can result in serious started, the operating mode last set will If the difference in speed between the injury or death. be recalled and used. two vehicles is greater than approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the Operating Mode General Information warning light does not illuminate. The system may be activated/ This vehicle has systems that operate on Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) deactivated via the Information and radio frequency that comply with Part System Entertainment System. To access the 15 of the Federal Communications This system assists the driver during function, select the following items on Commission (FCC) rules and with reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced the main menu in sequence: Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. visibility. 1. “Settings.” The RCP system monitors the rear Operation is subject to the following two detection areas on both sides of the 2. “Safety.” conditions: vehicle to detect objects moving toward 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” 1. The device may not cause harmful the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum interference. speed between approximately 1 mph "Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" Mode (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects When the system is enabled, the warning 2. The device must accept any moving at a maximum speed of 21 mph light within the door mirror on the side of interference received, including (35 km/h), in areas such as parking lots. the detected object illuminates. interference that may cause undesired The system activation is signaled to the operation of the device. driver by an audible warning. 107 Changes or modifications to any of these In the event of an imminent collision, the seconds. Make sure you press the brake systems by other than an authorized system intervenes by automatically pedal if the vehicle moves slightly service facility could void authorization applying the vehicle’s brakes to prevent a forward. to use this equipment. collision or reduce its effects.

SAFETY Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) The system provides the driver with System audible and visual signals through Warning! specific messages on the instrument This is a driving assistance system cluster display. composed of a radar located behind the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not The system may lightly brake to warn the intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor front bumper and a camera located in the driver if a possible frontal accident is center of the windshield. can FCW detect every type of potential detected (limited braking). Signals and collision. The driver has the responsibility to limited braking are intended to allow the avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via driver to react promptly, in order to braking and steering. Failure to follow this prevent or reduce the effects of a warning could lead to serious injury or death. potential accident. In situations with the risk of collision, if Engagement/Disengagement the system detects no intervention by The following functions can be selected the driver, it provides automatic braking in sequence using the Information and to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the Entertainment System: potential frontal collision (automatic braking). If intervention by the driver on 1. “Settings.” 0403132300US the brake pedal is detected, but not 2. “Safety.” Front Bumper Radar Location deemed sufficient, the system may intervene in order to improve the 3. “Forward Collision Warning.” reaction of the braking system, therefore reducing vehicle speed further 4. “Mode.” (additional assistance in braking stage). Select from among three operating The system will intervene automatically modes: in case of imminent collision or impact Warning and brake: the system (if against a pedestrian crossing the road active), in addition to the visual and (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h). audible warnings, provides limited Note: For safety reasons, when the braking, automatic braking and additional vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers assistance in braking stage, where the may remain blocked for about two 0403132301US driver does not brake sufficiently in the Windshield Camera Location event of a potential frontal impact. 108 Only warning: the system (if active), When the ignition is in the ON position. is close. This setting offers the driver a does not provide limited braking, but lower reaction time compared to the When the vehicle speed is between guarantees automatic braking or "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). additional assistance in braking stage, potential collision, but permits more where the driver does not brake at all or When the front seat belts are dynamic driving of the vehicle. not sufficiently in the event of a potential fastened. The system sensitivity setting is kept in frontal impact. The "Alfa DNA Pro" selector is not in the memory when the engine is turned Disable: the system does not provide RACE position (if equipped). OFF. visual and audible warnings, limited System Limited Operation Warning Changing The System Sensitivity braking, automatic braking or additional If a dedicated message is displayed, a The sensitivity of the system can be assistance in braking stage. The system condition limiting the system operation changed through the Information and will therefore provide no indication of a may have occurred. The possible reasons Entertainment System menu, choosing possible collision. of this limitation are something is from one of the following three options: blocking the camera view or a fault. Activation/Deactivation "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the The Forward Collision Warning system is description in the Information and If an obstruction is signaled, clean the activated whenever the engine is started Entertainment System Supplement for area of the radar on the front bumper, regardless of what is shown in the how to change the settings. and the camera area on the windshield. Information and Entertainment System. The default setting is "Med". With this If a fault in the system is occurring, it will Following a deactivation, the system will setting, the system warns the driver of a still be possible to drive the vehicle not warn the driver about the possible possible collision with the vehicle in front normally, but automatic braking will not collision with a preceding vehicle, when that vehicle is at a standard be available in the event of an impending regardless of the setting selected in the distance, between that of the other two collision. Information and Entertainment System. settings. When the conditions limiting the system Note: Each time the engine is started, With the system sensitivity set to "Far", functions end, this will go back to normal the system is activated regardless of the system will warn the driver of a and complete operation. Should the fault what setting was selected when the possible collision with the vehicle in front persist, contact your authorized dealer. engine was turned OFF. when that vehicle is at a greater distance, System Failure Signaling This function is not active at a speed thus providing the possibility of acting on If the system turns off and a dedicated lower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than the brakes more lightly and gradually. message is shown on the display, it 124 mph (200 km/h). This setting provides the drivers with the means that there is a fault with the The system is active: maximum possible reaction time to system. prevent a potential accident. Each time the engine is started. In this case, it is still possible to drive the With the option set to "Near", the system vehicle, but you are advised to contact When feature is selected within the will alert the driver of a possible collision your authorized dealer as soon as Information and Entertainment System. with the vehicle in front when that vehicle possible. 109 Radar Indication Not Available trim and cleaning the radar surface could Vehicles traveling at right angles to the If conditions are such that the radar be required. Have this operation vehicle. cannot detect obstacles correctly, the performed at your authorized dealer. Note: In particularly complex traffic system is deactivated and a dedicated Note: It is recommended that you do not conditions, the driver can deactivate the

SAFETY message appears on the display. This install devices, accessories or system manually through the Information generally occurs in the event of poor aerodynamic attachments in front of the and Entertainment System. visibility, such as when it is snowing or sensor or darken it in any way, as this can raining heavily. compromise the correct functioning of Driving Close To A Bend The function of this system can also be the system. When entering or leaving a wide bend, the temporarily reduced due to obstructions system may detect a vehicle in front you, Frontal Collision Alarm With Active but not driving in the same driving lane. In such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Braking such cases, a dedicated message will be cases such as these, the system may If this function is selected, the brakes are shown on the display and the system will intervene. operated to reduce the speed of the be deactivated. This message can vehicle in the event of potential frontal sometimes appear in conditions of high impact. reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions This function applies an additional limiting the system functions end, it will braking pressure if the braking pressure go back to normal and complete applied by the driver does not suffice to operation. prevent potential frontal impact. In certain cases, this dedicated message The function is active with speed above could be displayed when the radar is not 4 mph (7 km/h). detecting any vehicles or objects within Driving In Special Conditions its view range. In certain driving conditions, system 06016V0005EM If atmospheric conditions are not the intervention might be unexpected or Driving Around Wide Curves reason behind this message, check if the delayed. The driver must therefore be sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A very careful, keeping control of the Roundabout clean or remove any obstructions in the vehicle to drive in complete safety. area. On a roundabout, the system could Driving close to a bend. If the message appears frequently, even intervene when it detects a vehicle ahead that is leaving the roundabout. in the absence of atmospheric conditions The vehicle ahead is leaving a such as snow, rain, mud or other roundabout. obstructions, contact your authorized Vehicles with small dimensions and/or dealer for a sensor alignment check. not aligned in the driving lane. In the absence of visible obstructions, manually removing the decorative cover Lane change by other vehicles. 110 Lane Change By Other Vehicles Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the same lane as your vehicle within the operating range of the radar sensor, may cause the system to intervene.

06016V0010EM 06016V0008EM Driving In Roundabouts Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range Vehicles With Small Dimensions And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane The system cannot detect vehicles in Warning! front of the vehicle if they are outside the 06016V0007EM range of the radar sensor or may not Other Vehicles Changing Lanes react to small vehicles, such as bicycles Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To The system has not been designed to or motorcycles. The Vehicle prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in The system could temporarily react to a advance. Failure to take into account this vehicle that is passing at right angles warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. through the radar sensor’s operating range. The system may activate, assessing the trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of reflecting metal objects different from other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways, objects near road constructions sites or higher than the vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the system may intervene inside multi-story 06016V0006EM parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on Driving Near Small Vehicles the road surface. These possible activations are a consequence of the real driving scenario coverage by the system and must not be regarded as faults.

111 The system has been designed for road Tire Pressure Monitoring System level. Therefore, if insufficient tire use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, (TPMS) pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning the system must be deactivated to avoid The vehicle is equipped with a Tire light displaying in the instrument cluster, unnecessary warnings. Automatic Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that increase the inflation pressure up to the deactivation is signaled by the dedicated prescribed cold inflation value.

SAFETY sends the inflation pressure information warning light/symbol switching on in the of each tire to the control unit, and will The system will automatically update, instrument panel (refer to the instructions in the "Warning Lights And Messages On The signal the driver in the event of and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your insufficient tire pressure. Warning Light” will turn off once the Instrument Panel" for further information). Tire pressure will vary with temperature system receives the updated tire by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every pressures. The vehicle may need to be 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the driven for up to 20 minutes above General Information outside temperature decreases, the tire 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS This vehicle has systems that operate on pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure to receive this information. radio frequency that comply with Part should always be set based on cold Operating Example inflation tire pressure. This is defined as 15 of the Federal Communications For example, your vehicle may have a the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Commission (FCC) rules and with recommended cold (parked for more than been driven for at least three hours, or Industry Canada Standards RSS- three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a GEN/210/220/310. (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is three hour period. The cold tire inflation Operation is subject to the following two 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire pressure must not exceed the maximum conditions: pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a inflation pressure molded into the tire temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will 1. The device may not cause harmful sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing decrease the tire pressure to interference. And Maintenance” for information on approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. pressure is low enough to turn on the 2. The device must accept any The tire pressure will also increase as the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” interference received, including vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there Driving the vehicle may cause the tire interference that may cause undesired should be no adjustment for this pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi operation of the device. increased pressure. (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Changes or modifications to any of these The TPMS will signal the driver if Monitoring Warning Light” will still be on. systems by other than an authorized pressure falls below the warning limit for In this situation, the “Tire Pressure service facility could void authorization any reason, including the effects of low Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off to use this equipment. temperature and normal loss of pressure only after the tires are inflated to the from the tire. vehicle’s recommended cold placard The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient pressure value. tire pressure when pressure is equal to or greater than the prescribed cold inflation 112 Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication Packed snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. Caution! If an insufficient pressure value is detected on one or more tires, the Using tire chains on the vehicle. warning light in the instrument cluster The TPMS has been optimized for the will display alongside the dedicated Using wheels/tires not equipped with original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS messages, the system will highlight the TPMS sensors. pressures and warning have been tire or tires with insufficient pressure After the punctured tire has been established for the tire size equipped on graphically, and an acoustic signal will be repaired with the original tire sealant your vehicle. Undesirable system operation emitted. or sensor damage may result when using contained in the TireKit, the previous replacement equipment that is not of the In this case, stop the vehicle, check the condition must be restored so that the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate warning light is off during normal sensor is not designed for use on the necessary tire or tires to the correct driving. aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a cold inflation pressure value, shown on TPMS Deactivation poor overall system performance or sensor the display or in the dedicated TPMS damage. Customers are encouraged to use menu. The TPMS can be deactivated by OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature replacing all four wheel and tire operation. TPMS Temporarily Disabled: assemblies (road tires) with wheel and Using aftermarket tire sealants may TPMS Check Message tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When a system fault is detected, the “Tire wheel and tire assemblies on your (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will vehicle. using an aftermarket tire sealant it is flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then recommended that you take your vehicle to remain on solid. The system fault will also To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all your authorized dealer to have your sensor four wheel and tire assemblies (road function checked. sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provided that tires) with tires not equipped with Tire After inspecting or adjusting the tire the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. pressure always reinstall the valve stem Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from turn off when the fault condition no above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will entering the valve stem, which could chime, the "TPMS Warning Light" will damage the TPMS sensor. longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will Jamming due to electronic devices or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” driving next to facilities emitting the message and then display dashes (--) in same radio frequencies as the TPMS place of the pressure values. sensors. Beginning with the next ignition switch Installing some form of aftermarket cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or window tinting that affects radio wave display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” signals. message in the instrument cluster. 113 Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of The TPMS is not a substitute for OCCUPANT RESTRAINT the pressure values. proper tire maintenance, and it is the SYSTEMS To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four driver’s responsibility to maintain Some of the most important safety wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if features in your vehicle are the restraint

SAFETY with tires equipped with TPM sensors. systems: Then, drive the vehicle for up to underinflation has not reached the level 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The to trigger illumination of the “Tire Occupant Restraint Systems Features TPMS will chime, the "TPM Warning Pressure Monitoring Warning Light”. Seat Belt Systems Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds Seasonal temperature changes will and then turn off. The instrument cluster affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will Supplemental Restraint Systems will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” monitor the actual tire pressure in the (SRS) Air Bags message and then display pressure tire. Child Restraints values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM General Information Some of the safety features described in SYSTEM" message will no longer be this section may be standard equipment displayed, as long as no system fault The following regulatory statement on some models, or may be optional exists. applies to all radio frequency (RF) equipment on others. If you are not sure, devices equipped in this vehicle: ask an authorized dealer. Note: This device complies with Part 15 of the The TPMS is not intended to replace FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Important Safety Precautions normal tire care and maintenance, or to Canada. Operation is subject to the Please pay close attention to the provide warning of a tire failure or following two conditions: information in this section. It tells you condition. (1) This device may not cause harmful how to use your restraint system The TPMS should not be used as a interference. properly, to keep you and your tire pressure gauge while adjusting your (2) This device must accept any passengers as safe as possible. tire pressure. interference received, including Here are some simple steps you can take interference that may cause undesired to minimize the risk of harm from a Driving on a significantly operation. deploying air bag: underinflated tire will cause the tire to Note: Changes or modifications not overheat, and can lead to tire failure. 1. Children 12 years old and under expressly approved by the party Underinflation also reduces fuel should always ride buckled up in the rear responsible for compliance could void the efficiency and tire tread life, and may seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. user’s authority to operate the affect the vehicle’s handling and equipment. stopping ability.

114 2. A child who is not big enough to wear 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to needs to be modified to accommodate a motor vehicle should be belted at all “Child Restraints” in this section for disabled person, refer to the “Customer times. further information) must be secured in Assistance” section for customer service the appropriate child restraint or contact information. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder belt-positioning booster seat in a rear System (BeltAlert) seating position. Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in Warning! Equipped) a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in BeltAlert is a feature intended to the front passenger seat, move the seat Never place a rear-facing child restraint in remind the driver and outboard front as far back as possible and use the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger seat passenger (if equipped with proper child restraint (Refer to “Child front air bag can cause death or serious outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Restraints” in this section for further injury to a child 12 years or younger, to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert information). including a child in a rear-facing child feature is active whenever the ignition restraint. switch is in the AVV/START or ON/RUN 4. Never allow children to slide the position. shoulder belt behind them or under their Never install a rear-facing child restraint arm. in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Initial Indication rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If 5. Youshould read the instructions the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not If the driver is unbuckled when the provided with your child restraint to transport a rear-facing child restraint in ignition switch is first in the AVV/START make sure that you are using it properly. that vehicle. or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or 6. All occupants should always wear Seat Belt Systems outboard front seat passenger (if their lap and shoulder belts properly. equipped with outboard front passenger Buckle up even though you are an seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the 7. The driver and front passenger seats excellent driver, even on short trips. ignition switch is first in the AVV/START should be moved back as far as practical Someone on the road may be a poor or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt to allow the front air bags room to inflate. driver and could cause a collision that Reminder Light will turn on and remain on 8. Do not lean against the door or includes you. This can happen far away until both outboard front seat belts are window. If your vehicle has side air bags, from home or on your own street. buckled. The outboard front passenger and deployment occurs, the side air bags Research has shown that seat belts save seat BeltAlert is not active when an will inflate forcefully into the space lives, and they can reduce the outboard front passenger seat is between occupants and the door and seriousness of injuries in a collision. unoccupied. occupants could be injured. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking 115 BeltAlert Warning Sequence the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, The BeltAlert warning sequence is recommended that pets be restrained in inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, activated when the vehicle is moving the rear seat (if equipped) in pet people riding in these areas are more likely above a specified vehicle speed range harnesses or pet carriers that are to be seriously injured or killed. secured by seat belts, and cargo is SAFETY and the driver or outboard front seat Do not allow people to ride in any area of passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with properly stowed. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Lap/Shoulder Belts and seat belts. (the outboard front passenger seat Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a BeltAlert is not active when the outboard All seating positions in your vehicle are seat and using a seat belt properly. front passenger seat is unoccupied). The equipped with lap/shoulder belts. Occupants, including the driver, should BeltAlert warning sequence starts by The seat belt webbing retractor will lock always wear their seat belts whether or not blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and only during very sudden stops or an air bag is also provided at their seating sounding an intermittent chime. Once the collisions. This feature allows the position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. BeltAlert warning sequence has shoulder part of the seat belt to move completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light freely with you under normal conditions. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could will remain on until the seat belts are However, in a collision the seat belt will make your injuries in a collision much worse. buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence lock and reduce your risk of striking the Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you may repeat based on vehicle speed until inside of the vehicle or being thrown out could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt the driver and occupied outboard front of the vehicle. seat passenger seat belts are buckled. safely and to keep your passengers safe, The driver should instruct all occupants too. to buckle their seat belts. Warning! Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can Change of Status crash into one another in a collision, hurting If the driver or outboard front seat Relying on the air bags alone could lead to one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder passenger (if equipped with outboard more severe injuries in a collision. The air belt or a lap belt for more than one person, front passenger seat BeltAlert) bags work with your seat belt to restrain no matter what their size. unbuckles their seat belt while the you properly. In some collisions, the air bags vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat sequence will begin until the seat belts belt even though you have air bags. Warning! are buckled again. In a collision, you and your passengers can The outboard front passenger seat suffer much greater injuries if you are not BeltAlert is not active when the outboard properly buckled up. Youcan strike the A lap belt worn too high can increase the front passenger seat is unoccupied. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt BeltAlert may be triggered when an or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic animal or other items are placed on the Always be sure you and others in your bones, but across your abdomen. Always vehicle are buckled up properly. outboard front passenger seat or when wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. 116 A twisted seat belt may not protect you replaced immediately. Do not disassemble 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug properly. In a collision, it could even cut into or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt and lies low across your hips, below your you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your assemblies must be replaced after a abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt body, without twists. If you can’t straighten collision. portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the authorized dealer immediately and have it latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug fixed. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong Instructions the seat belt in a collision. buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the possibly causing internal injuries. Always Sit back and adjust the seat. shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the you. resting on your neck. The retractor will back of the front seat, and next to your withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. A seat belt that is too loose will not arm in the rear seat (for vehicles protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the 6. To release the seat belt, push the red could move too far forward, increasing the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. button on the buckle. The seat belt will possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as automatically retract to its stowed snugly. far as necessary to allow the seat belt to position. If necessary, slide the latch A seat belt that is worn under your arm is go around your lap. plate down the webbing to allow the seat dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside belt to retract fully. surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 3. When the seat belt is long enough to increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting worn under the arm can cause internal until you hear a “click.” injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder Procedure bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will Use the following procedure to untwist a take the force in a collision. twisted lap/shoulder belt. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not 1. Position the latch plate as close as protect you from injury during a collision. possible to the anchor point. Youare more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to above the latch plate, grasp and twist the be used together. seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. in a collision and leave you with no 0101132150US protection. Inspect the seat belt system Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or Belt Buckle loose parts. Damaged parts must be 117 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the As a guide, if you are shorter than Always make all seat belt height folded webbing. The folded webbing average, you will prefer the shoulder belt adjustments when the vehicle is stationary. must enter the slot at the top of the latch anchorage in a lower position, and if you plate. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher Seat Belts And Pregnant Women SAFETY 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up position. After you release the anchorage until it clears the folded webbing and the button, try to move it up or down to make seat belt is no longer twisted. sure that it is locked in position. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Note: The adjustable upper shoulder belt Anchorage anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder In the driver and outboard front belt anchorage to be adjusted in the passenger seats, the top of the shoulder upward position without pushing or belt can be adjusted upward or squeezing the release button. To verify

downward to position the seat belt away the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, 0226075266 from your neck. Push or squeeze the pull downward on the shoulder belt Pregnant Women And Seat Belts anchorage button to release the anchorage until it is locked into position. anchorage, and move it up or down to the Seat belts must be worn by all occupants position that serves you best. including pregnant women: the risk of Warning! injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could Position the lap belt snug and low below make your injuries in a collision much worse. the abdomen and across the strong Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt across the chest and away from the neck. safely and to keep your passengers safe, Never place the shoulder belt behind the too. back or under the arm. Position the shoulder belt across the Seat Belt Pretensioner shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack 0101132173US so that it is comfortable and not resting on The front outboard seat belt system is Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt your neck. The retractor will withdraw any equipped with pretensioning devices that Anchorage slack in the shoulder belt. are designed to remove slack from the 4 — Adjustable Anchorage Misadjustment of the seat belt could seat belt in the event of a collision. These reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt devices may improve the performance of in a crash. the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. 118 Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child Warning! restraints. Note: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the Never place a rear-facing child restraint occupant. The seat belt still must be worn in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger snugly and positioned properly. front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, The pretensioners are triggered by the including a child in a rear-facing child Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). restraint. Like the air bags, the pretensioners are 16086V0101NA ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Never install a rear-facing child restraint single use items. A deployed Retractor pretensioner or a deployed air bag must in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a If the passenger seating position is rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If be replaced immediately. the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not equipped with an ALR and is being used Energy Management Feature transport a rear-facing child restraint in for normal usage, only pull the seat belt that vehicle. The front outboard seat belt system is webbing out far enough to comfortably equipped with an Energy Management wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR How To Engage The Automatic Locking feature that may help further reduce the Mode risk of injury in the event of a collision. is activated, you will hear a clicking sound The seat belt system has a retractor as the seat belt retracts. Allow the 1. Buckle the combination lap and assembly that is designed to release webbing to retract completely in this shoulder belt. webbing in a controlled manner. case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull Switchable Automatic Locking comfortably wrap around the occupant’s downward until the entire seat belt is Retractors (ALR) mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the extracted. buckle until you hear a "click." The seat belts in the passenger seating 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking positions are equipped with a Switchable belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which sound. This indicates the seat belt is now belt will still retract to remove any slack in the Automatic Locking Mode. is used to secure a child restraint system. in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic For additional information, refer to Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is “Installing Child Restraints Using The installed in a seating position that has a Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child seat belt with this feature. Children Restraints” section of this manual. The 12 years old and under should always be figure below illustrates the locking properly restrained in the rear seat of a feature for each seating position. vehicle with a rear seat. 119 How To Disengage The Automatic Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the position, the air bag system is not on and Locking Mode internal circuits and interconnecting the air bags will not inflate. Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder wiring associated with the electrical Air The ORC contains a backup power supply belt and allow it to retract completely to Bag System Components. Yourvehicle system that may deploy the air bag may be equipped with the following Air

SAFETY disengage the Automatic Locking Mode system even if the battery loses power or and activate the vehicle sensitive Bag System Components: it becomes disconnected prior to (emergency) locking mode. Air Bag System Components deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Light in the instrument panel for Warning! Air Bag Warning Light approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is Steering Wheel and Column first in the ON/RUN position. After the The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Instrument Panel self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction belt function is not working properly when Knee Impact Bolsters in any part of the system, it turns on the checked according to the procedures in the Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Air Bag Warning Light, either Service Manual. momentarily or continuously. A single Seat Belt Buckle Switch Failure to replace the seat belt assembly chime will sound to alert you if the light could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Supplemental Side Air Bags comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Knee Air Bags to restrain occupants who are wearing the will illuminate the instrument panel Air seat belt or children who are using booster Front and Side Impact Sensors Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is seats. The locked mode is only used to detected that could affect the air bag install rear-facing or forward-facing child Seat Belt Pretensioners system. The diagnostics also record the restraints that have a harness for Seat Track Position Sensors nature of the malfunction. While the air restraining the child. bag system is designed to be Air Bag Warning Light maintenance free, if any of the following Supplemental Restraint Systems occurs, have an authorized dealer service (SRS) the air bag system immediately. Some of the safety features described in The Air Bag Warning Light does not The ORC monitors the readiness of the come on during the four to eight seconds this section may be standard equipment electronic parts of the air bag system on some models, or may be optional when the ignition switch is first in the whenever the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. equipment on others. If you are not sure, START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition ask an authorized dealer. switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC The Air Bag Warning Light remains on The air bag system must be ready to after the four to eight-second interval. protect you in a collision. The Occupant 120 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning intermittently or remains on while Light has come on and a fault has been driving. detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, Warning Light comes on intermittently or or any engine related gauges are not remains on while driving have an working, the Occupant Restraint authorized dealer service the vehicle Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In immediately. this condition the air bags may not be For additional information regarding the ready to inflate for your protection. Have Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to an authorized dealer service the air bag “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” section of this manual. system immediately. 0101132154US Front Air Bags Passenger Front Air Bag Warning! This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your supplement to the seat belt restraint instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a systems. The driver front air bag is collision. If the light does not come on as a mounted in the center of the steering bulb check when the ignition is first turned wheel. The passenger front air bag is on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if mounted in the instrument panel, above it comes on as you drive, have an authorized the glove compartment. The words “SRS dealer service the air bag system AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on immediately. the air bag covers.

0101132155US Redundant Air Bag Warning Light Driver Knee Air Bag Location/Knee Bolster Location

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In 0101132152US addition, a single chime will sound to alert Driver Front Air Bag 121 Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features Warning! The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air No objects should be placed over or near SAFETY bags. This system provides output the air bag on the instrument panel or appropriate to the severity and type of steering wheel because any such objects collision as determined by the Occupant could cause harm if the vehicle is in a Restraint Controller (ORC), which may collision severe enough to cause the air bag receive information from the front to inflate. impact sensors (if equipped) or other Do not put anything on or around the air 0101132158US system components. bag covers or attempt to open them Passenger Knee Air Bag Location/Knee manually. Youmay damage the air bags and Bolster Location The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that you could be injured because the air bags requires air bag deployment. A low may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed Warning! energy output is used in less severe to open only when the air bags are inflating. collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air Being too close to the steering wheel or This vehicle may be equipped with a bags work with your seat belt to restrain instrument panel during front air bag driver and/or front passenger seat belt you properly. In some collisions, air bags deployment could cause serious injury, buckle switch that detects whether the won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat including death. Air bags need room to driver or front passenger seat belt is belts even though you have air bags. inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may instrument panel. adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. Front Air Bag Operation Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger This vehicle may be equipped with driver Front Air Bags are designed to provide front air bag can cause death or serious and/or front passenger seat track additional protection by supplementing injury to a child 12 years or younger, position sensors that may adjust the the seat belts. Front air bags are not including a child in a rear-facing child inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air expected to reduce the risk of injury in restraint. Bags based upon seat position. rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front Never install a rear-facing child restraint air bags will not deploy in all frontal in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a collisions, including some that may rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If produce substantial vehicle damage — the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not for example, some pole collisions, truck transport a rear-facing child restraint in underrides, and angle offset collisions. that vehicle. 122 On the other hand, depending on the type on a label or on the seat trim on the and location of impact, front air bags may outboard side of the seats. Warning! deploy in crashes with little vehicle The SABs may help to reduce the risk of front-end damage but that produce a occupant injury during certain side severe initial deceleration. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impacts, in addition to the injury Because air bag sensors measure vehicle impact bolsters in any way. reduction potential provided by the seat deceleration over time, vehicle speed and Do not mount any accessories to the knee belts and body structure. damage by themselves are not good impact bolsters such as alarm lights, indicators of whether or not an air bag stereos, citizen band radios, etc. should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your Supplemental Driver And Front protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away Passenger Knee Air Bags from an inflating air bag. This vehicle is equipped with a When the ORC detects a collision Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag requiring the front air bags, it signals the mounted in the instrument panel below inflator units. A large quantity of the steering column and a Supplemental non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the 0101132163US front air bags. instrument panel below the glove Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side The steering wheel hub trim cover and compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bag the upper passenger side of the Air Bags provide enhanced protection instrument panel separate and fold out of during a frontal impact by working When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam the way as the air bags inflate to their full together with the seat belts, on the outboard side of the seatback’s size. The front air bags fully inflate in less pretensioners, and front air bags. trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys time than it takes to blink your eyes. The through the seat seam into the space front air bags then quickly deflate while Supplemental Side Air Bags between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with helping to restrain the driver and front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air such a high force that it could injure passenger. Bags (SABs) occupants if they are not seated Knee Impact Bolsters This vehicle is equipped with properly, or if items are positioned in the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air area where the SAB inflates. Children are The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect Bags (SABs). at an even greater risk of injury from a the knees of the driver and front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air deploying air bag. passenger, and position the front Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard occupants for improved interaction with side of the front seats. The SABs are the front air bags. marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” 123 outboard occupants in certain side Side Impacts impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! The Side Air Bags are designed to reduction potential provided by the seat activate in certain side impacts. The belts and body structure. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Do not use accessory seat covers or place

SAFETY The SABIC deploys downward, covering determines whether the deployment of objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the side windows. An inflating SABIC the Side Air Bags in a particular impact the performance could be adversely pushes the outside edge of the headliner event is appropriate, based on the affected and/or objects could be pushed into out of the way and covers the window. severity and type of collision. The side you, causing serious injury. The SABICs inflate with enough force to impact sensors aid the ORC in injure occupants if they are not belted determining the appropriate response to Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are impact events. The system is calibrated Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater side of the vehicle during impacts that Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag. require Side Air Bag occupant protection. Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle independently; a left side impact deploys Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in the left Side Air Bags only and a side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events. right-side impact deploys the right Side SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is “AIRBAG.” not a good indicator of whether or not Warning! Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all Do not mount equipment, or stack side collisions, including some collisions luggage or other cargo up high enough to at certain angles, or some side collisions block the deployment of the SABICs. The that do not impact the area of the trim covering above the side windows where passenger compartment. The Side Air the SABIC and its deployment path are Bags may deploy during angled or offset located should remain free from any frontal collisions where the front air bags obstructions. deploy. In order for the SABICs to work as Side Air Bags are a supplement to the intended, do not install any accessory items seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags 0101132180US in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do deploy in less time than it takes to blink Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable not add an aftermarket sunroof to your your eyes. Curtain (SABIC) Location vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) SABICs may help reduce the risk of head for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not and other injuries to front and rear seat drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. 124 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could Air Bag System Components Warning! lead to more severe injuries in a collision. Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and to restrain you properly. In some collisions, interconnecting wiring associated with Occupants, including children, who are up Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have electrical Air Bag System Components against or very close to Side Air Bags can be listed below: seriously injured or killed. Occupants, Side Air Bags. including children, should never lean on or Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) sleep against the door, side windows, or Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious area where the side air bags inflate, even if Air Bag Warning Light they are in an infant or child restraint. in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Steering Wheel and Column Seat belts (and child restraints where Instrument Panel appropriate) are necessary for your Rollover Events protection in all collisions. They also help Side Air Bags are designed to activate in Knee Impact Bolsters keep you in position, away from an inflating certain rollover events. The ORC Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Side Air Bag. To get the best protection determines whether the deployment of from the Side Air Bags, occupants must the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover Seat Belt Buckle Switch wear their seat belts properly and sit event is appropriate, based on the upright with their backs against the seats. Supplemental Side Air Bags Children must be properly restrained in a severity and type of collision. Vehicle child restraint or booster seat that is damage by itself is not a good indicator Supplemental Knee Air Bags of whether or not Side Air Bags should appropriate for the size of the child. Front and Side Impact Sensors have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all Seat Belt Pretensioners rollover events. The rollover sensing Warning! Seat Track Position Sensors system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether If A Deployment Occurs Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not deployment is appropriate. In the event lean against the door or window. Sit upright the vehicle experiences a rollover or near The front air bags are designed to deflate in the center of the seat. rollover event, and deployment of the immediately after deployment. Being too close to the Side Air Bags Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover Note: Front and/or side air bags will not during deployment could cause you to be sensing system will also deploy the seat deploy in all collisions. This does not severely injured or killed. belt pretensioners on both sides of the mean something is wrong with the air bag vehicle. system. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. 125 If you do have a collision which deploys Flash hazard lights as long as the the air bags, any or all of the following battery has power Warning! may occur: Turn on the interior lights, which The air bag material may sometimes remain on as long as the battery has Deployed air bags and seat belt SAFETY cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to power or for 15 minutes from the the occupants as the air bags deploy and pretensioners cannot protect you in another intervention of the Enhanced Accident collision. Have the air bags, seat belt unfold. The abrasions are similar to pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor Response System. friction rope burns or those you might get assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer Unlock the power door locks. sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. immediately. Also, have the Occupant They are not caused by contact with Restraint Controller System serviced as Yourvehicle may also be designed to chemicals. They are not permanent and well. perform any of these other functions in normally heal quickly. However, if you response to the Enhanced Accident Response System: haven’t healed significantly within a few Note: days, or if you have any blistering, see Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off Air bag covers may not be obvious in your doctor immediately. the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC the interior trim, but they will open Circulation Door As the air bags deflate, you may see during air bag deployment. some smoke-like particles. The particles Cut off battery power to the: are a normal by-product of the process After any collision, the vehicle should that generates the non-toxic gas used for be taken to an authorized dealer –Engine immediately. air bag inflation. These airborne particles –Electric Motor (if equipped) may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, Enhanced Accident Response –Electric power steering rinse the area with cool water. For nose System –Brake booster or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. In the event of an impact, if the –Electric park brake If these particles settle on your clothing, communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending –Automatic transmission gear follow the garment manufacturer’s selector instructions for cleaning. on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced –Horn Do not drive your vehicle after the air Accident Response System perform the bags have deployed. If you are involved in following functions: –Front wiper another collision, the air bags will not be –Headlamp washer pump in place to protect you. Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)

126 Note: After an accident, remember to for fuel leaks in the engine compartment damage to the vehicle electrical devices cycle the ignition to the STOP and on the ground near the engine (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key compartment and fuel tank before the system by following the procedure from the ignition switch to avoid draining resetting the system and starting the described below. If you have any doubt, the battery. Carefully check the vehicle engine. If there are no fuel leaks or contact an authorized dealer. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light BLINKS. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF.

127 Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

SAFETY Right turn light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed Right turn light is OFF. in Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF. 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be System is now reset and the engine may be started. completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

128 Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during This vehicle is equipped with an event a crash investigation. Warning! data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of To read data recorded by an EDR, special an EDR is to record, in certain crash or equipment is required, and access to the near crash-like situations, such as an air vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition Modifications to any part of the air bag bag deployment or hitting a road to the vehicle manufacturer, other system could cause it to fail when you need obstacle, data that will assist in it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system parties, such as law enforcement, that understanding how a vehicle’s systems is not there to protect you. Do not modify have the special equipment, can read the performed. The EDR is designed to the components or wiring, including adding information if they have access to the record data related to vehicle dynamics any kind of badges or stickers to the vehicle or the EDR. steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper and safety systems for a short period of passenger side of the instrument panel. Do time, typically 30 seconds or less. The Child Restraints not modify the front bumper, vehicle body EDR in this vehicle is designed to record Everyone in your vehicle needs to be structure, or add aftermarket side steps or such data as: running boards. buckled up at all times, including babies How various systems in your vehicle and children. Every state in the United It is dangerous to try to repair any part of were operating; States, and every Canadian province, the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell requires that small children ride in proper anyone who works on your vehicle that it Whether or not the driver and restraint systems. This is the law, and you has an air bag system. passenger safety belts were can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Do not attempt to modify any part of your buckled/fastened; Children 12 years or younger should ride air bag system. The air bag may inflate How far (if at all) the driver was accidentally or may not function properly if properly buckled up in a rear seat, if modifications are made. Take your vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake available. According to crash statistics, to an authorized dealer for any air bag pedal; and, children are safer when properly system service. If your seat, including your How fast the vehicle was traveling. restrained in the rear seats rather than in trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced the front. in any way (including removal or These data can help provide a better loosening/tightening of seat attachment understanding of the circumstances in bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized which crashes and injuries occur. dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat Note: EDR data are recorded by your accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation with disabilities, contact an authorized occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR dealer. under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR 129 to the child almost large enough for an Note: adult safety belt. Always check the child Warning! For additional information, refer to seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and- have the correct seat for your child. caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236 In a collision, an unrestrained child can Carefully read and follow all the SAFETY become a projectile inside the vehicle. The instructions and warnings in the child Canadian residents should refer to force required to hold even an infant on your restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the Transport Canada’s website for lap could become so great that you could not labels attached to the child restraint. additional information: http:// hold the child, no matter how strong you are. Before buying any restraint system, www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ The child and others could be badly injured or make sure that it has a label certifying motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers- killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should childsafety-index-53.htm be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Youshould also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where There are different sizes and types of you will use it. restraints for children from newborn size Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the limits of their child restraint vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

130 Infant And Child Restraints Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Warning! Safety experts recommend that children rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not are two years old or until they reach transport a rear-facing child restraint in Improper installation can lead to failure either the height or weight limit of their that vehicle. of an infant or child restraint. It could come rear-facing child restraint. Two types of loose in a collision. The child could be badly child restraints can be used rear-facing: injured or killed. Follow the child restraint infant carriers and convertible child Older Children And Child Restraints manufacturer’s directions exactly when seats. Children who are two years old or who installing an infant or child restraint. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing have outgrown their rear-facing After a child restraint is installed in the in the vehicle. It is recommended for convertible child seat can ride vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat children from birth until they reach the forward-facing in the vehicle. forward or rearward because it can loosen weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Forward-facing child seats and the child restraint attachments. Remove the Convertible child seats can be used either convertible child seats used in the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle rear-facing or forward-facing in the forward-facing direction are for children seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. vehicle. Convertible child seats often who are over two years old or who have have a higher weight limit in the outgrown the rear-facing weight or When your child restraint is not in use, rear-facing direction than infant carriers height limit of their rear-facing secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or do, so they can be used rear-facing by convertible child seat. Children should LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the children who have outgrown their infant remain in a forward-facing child seat with vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In carrier but are still less than at least two a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the a harness for as long as possible, up to occupants or seatbacks and cause serious years old. Children should remain the highest weight or height allowed by personal injury. rear-facing until they reach the highest the child seat. weight or height allowed by their All children whose weight or height is convertible child seat. above the forward-facing limit for the Children Too Large For Booster child seat should use a belt-positioning Seats booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts Warning! Children who are large enough to wear fit properly. If the child cannot sit with the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose knees bent over the vehicle’s seat legs are long enough to bend over the cushion while the child’s back is against Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of the seat when their back is front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the seatback, they should use a against the seatback, should use the seat front air bag can cause death or serious belt-positioning booster seat. The child belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step injury to a child 12 years or younger, and belt-positioning booster seat are test to decide whether the child can use including a child in a rear-facing child held in the vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle’s seat belt alone: restraint. 131 1. Can the child sit all the way back 5. Can the child stay seated like this for against the back of the vehicle seat? the whole trip? Warning! 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably If the answer to any of these questions over the front of the vehicle seat – while was “no,” then the child still needs to use a Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt SAFETY the child is still sitting all the way back? booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the belt fit periodically and make sure the the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or child’s shoulder between the neck and seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s arm? death. A child must always wear both the lap squirming or slouching can move the belt and shoulder portions of the seat belt 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as out of position. If the shoulder belt correctly. possible, touching the child’s thighs and contacts the face or neck, move the child not the stomach? closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight of LATCH – Lower Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

132 Lower Anchors And Tethers For system has three vehicle anchor points LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for installing LATCH-equipped child Restraints In This Vehicle seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a 022668173 top tether anchorage but no lower LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, Yourvehicle is equipped with the child the seat belt must be used with the top 06086V0101NA restraint anchorage system called tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors restraint. Please see the following table Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH for more information. (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) TopTether Anchorage Symbol

133 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the What is the weight limit (child’s weight + combined weight of the child and the child

SAFETY weight of the child restraint) for using the restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt 65 lbs (29.5 kg) LATCH anchorage system to attach the child and tether anchor instead of the LATCH restraint? system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. be used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a position using the inner LATCH lower No child seat in the center seating position. anchorage? Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower Can two child restraints be attached using a No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child common lower LATCH anchorage? seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes manufacturer also allows contact. See your back of the front passenger seat? child restraint owner’s manual for more information. All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes restraint. See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information.

134 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. The lower anchorages Anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap Center Seat LATCH found at the rear of the anchorages behind each seat cushion where it rear seating position meets the seatback. located on the back of Warning! Each anchorage is the seat. under a cover with the anchorage symbol on it. Do not install a child restraint in the Lift the cover to access the lower center position using the LATCH system. anchorage. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. Youmust use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.

0502135677US Tether Strap Anchorage Locations Always follow the directions of the 0101132181US 3 — Tether Strap Anchorages child restraint manufacturer when LATCH Anchorage Locations installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar LATCH-compatible child restraint as described here. 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child have a hook or connector to attach to the Restraint lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. If the selected seating position has a Forward-facing child restraints and some Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor rear-facing child restraints will also be (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, equipped with a tether strap. The tether following the instructions below. See the strap will have a hook at the end to attach section “Installing Child Restraints Using to the top tether anchorage and a way to the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 135 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower 6. Test that the child restraint is straps and on the tether strap of the child installed tightly by pulling back and forth Warning! seat so that you can more easily attach on the child seat at the belt path. It should the hooks or connectors to the vehicle not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in anchorages. any direction. Improper installation of a child restraint SAFETY to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure 2. Place the child seat between the How To Stow An Unused of the restraint. The child could be badly lower anchorages for that seating Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: injured or killed. Follow the child restraint position. For some second row seats, you manufacturer’s directions exactly when may need to recline the seat and / or raise When using the LATCH attaching system installing an infant or child restraint. the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a to install a child restraint, stow all ALR Child restraint anchorages are designed better fit. If the rear seat can be moved seat belts that are not being used by to withstand only those loads imposed by forward and rearward in the vehicle, you other occupants or being used to secure correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no may wish to move it to its rear-most child restraints. An unused belt could circumstances are they to be used for adult position to make room for the child seat. injure a child if they play with it and seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Youmay also move the front seat accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. items or equipment to the vehicle. forward to allow more room for the child Before installing a child restraint using seat. the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt Installing Child Restraints Using behind the child restraint and out of the 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt The Vehicle Seat Belt of the child restraint to the lower interferes with the child restraint anchorages in the selected seating Child restraint systems are designed to installation, instead of buckling it behind position. be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the child restraint, route the seat belt the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. 4. If the child restraint has a tether through the child restraint belt path and strap, connect it to the top tether then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. anchorage. See the section “Installing Remind all children in the vehicle that the Warning! Child Restraints Using the TopTether seat belts are not toys and that they Anchorage” for directions to attach a should not play with them. Improper installation or failure to tether anchor. properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push badly injured or killed. the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s the straps according to the child restraint directions exactly when installing an infant manufacturer’s instructions. or child restraint.

136 The seat belts in the passenger seating Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For positions are equipped with a Switchable description in “Switchable Automatic Installing Child Restraints In This Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that Locking Retractors (ALR)” under Vehicle is designed to keep the lap portion of the “Occupant Restraint Systems” for seat belt tight around the child restraint additional information on ALR. so that it is not necessary to use a locking Please see the table below and the clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” following sections for more information. into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

16086V0101NA Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt Weight limit of the Child child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the Restraint belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer front passenger seat? also allows contact. All head restraints can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. See “Head Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with No against the belt path of the child restraint? an ALR retractor. 137 Installing A Child Restraint With A 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Any seat belt system will loosen with Switchable Automatic Locking until you hear a “click.” time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Retractor (ALR): 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to Installing Child Restraints Using SAFETY be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the The Top Tether Anchorage: the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the Warning! retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking Do not attach a tether strap for a sound. This means the seat belt is now in rear-facing car seat to any location in front Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. of the car seat, including the seat frame or a properly secure a child restraint can lead to tether anchorage. Only attach the tether failure of the restraint. The child could be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether badly injured or killed. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be anchorage that is approved for that seating Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s able to pull out any webbing. If the position, located behind the top of the directions exactly when installing an infant retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors or child restraint. and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing System” for the location of approved tether to tighten the lap portion around the child anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Place the child seat in the center of restraint while you push the child the seating position. For some second restraint rearward and downward into row seats, you may need to recline the the vehicle seat. seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear 8. If the child restraint has a top tether seat can be moved forward and rearward strap and the seating position has a top in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to tether anchorage, connect the tether its rear-most position to make room for strap to the anchorage and tighten the the child seat. Youmay also move the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the TopTether 1. Look behind the seating position front seat forward to allow more room where you plan to install the child for the child seat. Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. restraint to find the tether anchorage. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing Youmay need to move the seat forward from the retractor to pass it through the 9. Test that the child restraint is to provide better access to the tether belt path of the child restraint. Do not installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorage. If there is no top tether twist the belt webbing in the belt path. on the child seat at the belt path. It should anchorage for that seating position, not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in move the child restraint to another any direction. position in the vehicle if one is available. 138 2. Route the tether strap to provide the Transporting Pets most direct path for the strap between Warning! Air Bags deploying in the front seat could the anchor and the child seat. If your harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear thrown about and possibly injured, or head restraints, raise the head restraint, An incorrectly anchored tether strap injure a passenger during panic braking or and where possible, route the tether could lead to increased head motion and in a collision. strap under the head restraint and possible injury to the child. Use only the between the two posts. If not possible, anchorage position directly behind the child Pets should be restrained in the rear seat lower the head restraint and pass the seat to secure a child restraint top tether (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet tether strap around the outboard side of strap. carriers that are secured by seat belts. the head restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the slip into the opening between the seatbacks child restraint to the top tether as you remove slack in the strap. anchorage as shown in the diagram. Center Tether Special Instructions Center Tether Attachment: 1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full down position. 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head restraint. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the 0502135677US child restraint to the center tether Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting anchorage located on the back of the 3 — Tether Strap Anchorages seat. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. manufacturer’s instructions.

139 SAFETY TIPS If you are required to drive with the Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside The Vehicle Transporting Passengers trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. Seat Belts THE CARGO AREA. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. SAFETY Inspect the seat belt system periodically, If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. with the engine running, adjust your heating Damaged parts must be replaced Warning! or cooling controls to force outside air into immediately. Do not disassemble or the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. modify the system. Do not leave children or animals inside Front seat belt assemblies must be parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The best protection against carbon replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt build-up may cause serious injury or death. monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a assemblies must be replaced after a properly maintained engine exhaust collision if they have been damaged (i.e., It is extremely dangerous to ride in a system. bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are Whenever a change is noticed in the there is any question regarding seat belt more likely to be seriously injured or killed. sound of the exhaust system, when or retractor condition, replace the seat exhaust fumes can be detected inside the belt. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats vehicle, or when the underside or rear of Air Bag Warning Light and seat belts. the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust The Air Bag warning light will turn on Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a system and adjacent body areas for for four to eight seconds as a bulb check seat and using a seat belt properly. broken, damaged, deteriorated, or when the ignition switch is first turned to mispositioned parts. Open seams or ON/RUN. If the light is either not on Exhaust Gas loose connections could permit exhaust during starting, stays on, or turns on while fumes to seep into the passenger driving, have the system inspected at an compartment. In addition, inspect the authorized dealer as soon as possible. Warning! exhaust system each time the vehicle is After the bulb check, this light will raised for lubrication or oil change. illuminate with a single chime when a Replace as required. fault with the Air Bag System has been Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain detected. It will stay on until the fault is carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and removed. If the light comes on odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. intermittently or remains on while To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety driving, have an authorized dealer service tips: the vehicle immediately. Do not run the engine in a closed garage Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in or in confined areas any longer than needed “Safety” for further information. 140 to move your vehicle in or out of the area. Defroster ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR If the vehicle carpet has been removed MATFROM THE VEHICLE before and re-installed, always properly attach Check operation by selecting the defrost installing any other floor mat. NEVER install carpet to the floor and check the floor mat mode and place the blower control on or stack an additional floor mat on top of an fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. high speed. Youshould be able to feel the existing floor mat. Fully depress each pedal to check for air directed against the windshield. See interference with the accelerator, brake, or an authorized dealer for service if your ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that defroster is inoperable. cannot be properly attached and secured to It is recommended to only use mild soap Floor Mat Safety Information your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be and water to clean your floor mats. After replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat cleaning, always check your floor mat has Always use floor mats designed to fit for the specific make, model, and year of been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that your vehicle. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. does not interfere with the operation of ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. the driver’s side floor area. To check for Only use a floor mat that is securely interference, with the vehicle properly Periodic Safety Checks YouShould attached using the floor mat fasteners so parked with the engine off, fully depress the Make Outside The Vehicle it cannot slip out of position and interfere accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal with the accelerator, brake or clutch (if present) to check for interference. If your Tires floor mat interferes with the operation of pedals or impair safe operation of your any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, Examine tires for excessive tread wear vehicle in other ways. remove the floor mat from the vehicle and and uneven wear patterns. Check for place the floor mat in your trunk. stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect Warning! ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area. the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or slide into the driver’s side floor area when Check the wheel nuts for tightness. stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the vehicle is moving. Objects can become Check the tires (including spare) for fasteners may cause your floor mat to trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch proper cold inflation pressure. interfere with the accelerator, brake, or pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. Lights control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or Have someone observe the operation of DEATH: NEVER place any objects under the floor ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects brake lights and exterior lights while you mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT could change the position of the floor mat work the controls. Check turn signal and install your floor mat upside down or turn and may cause interference with the high beam indicator lights on the your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. instrument panel. mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. 141 Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

SAFETY Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

142 STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 144 see how you can explore its fullest ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF potential. We’ll look at how to drive EQUIPPED ...... 147 safely in any situation, making it a ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 147 welcome companion with our comfort AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....150 and wallets in mind. ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR ...... 156 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) . .159 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 159 SPEED LIMITER ...... 161 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 162 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 164 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM ...... 171 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 174 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES ...... 177 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 178 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 180 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....181

143 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a adjust the seat, the interior rear view start from a booster battery or the battery mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten 1. Apply the electric park brake and set in another vehicle. This type of start can be the seat belt correctly. the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to NEUTRAL (N). “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” Never press the accelerator pedal before for further information. starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. starting procedure can be shown in the Caution! display. 3. Briefly push the ignition button. 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! continuously crank the engine for more than procedure. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds If the problem persists, contact an before trying again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove authorized dealer. the key fob from the vehicle and lock your STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle. Remote Starting System This system uses the key fob to start the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The system has a range of at least 300 reasons. A child or others could be seriously into the throttle body air inlet opening in an feet (91 meters). or fatally injured. Children should be warned attempt to start the vehicle. This could The remote starting system also not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal result in flash fire causing serious personal activates the climate control (if or the transmission gear selector. injury. equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), Do not leave the key fob in or near the Do not attempt to push or tow your and the heated steering wheel (if vehicle, or in a location accessible to vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped equipped), depending on temperatures children. A child could operate power with an automatic transmission cannot be outside and inside of the vehicle. started this way. Unburned fuel could enter windows, other controls, or move the Note: Obstructions between the vehicle vehicle. the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the and key fob may reduce this range. Do not leave children or animals inside converter and vehicle. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

144 How To Use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Extended Park Starting Activation — If Equipped All of the following conditions must be If the vehicle has not been started or met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the driven for at least 90 days, it is advisable outside ambient temperature is less than Gear selector in PARK (P). to follow the indications below. 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer To start the engine, proceed as follows: Doors closed. will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume previous operation, except if the Hood closed. 1. Briefly push the ignition button Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. 2. If the engine does not start, wait five Liftgate closed. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and seconds and let the starter cool down and operation will continue. Hazard switch off. then repeat the starting procedure Cold Weather Operation Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not 3. If the engine does not start after eight pressed). To prevent possible engine damage while attempts, let the starter cool down for at Battery at an acceptable charge level. starting at low temperatures, this vehicle least 10 seconds, and then repeat the will inhibit engine cranking when the starting procedure PANIC button not pushed. ambient temperature is less than –22° F If the problem persists, contact your (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor System not disabled from previous authorized dealer. remote start event. reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externally- Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, Vehicle alarm system indicator powered electric engine block heater is very difficult starting, that can be noticed flashing. available as optional equipment or from through rapid fatigue of the starter, your authorized dealer. might also be due to a partially flat Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped battery. In this case, refer to "Jump The message “plug in engine heater” will with keyless ignition system). Starting" in "In Case Of Emergency". be displayed in the instrument cluster Fuel level meets minimum when the ambient temperature is below If Engine Fails To Start requirement. 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is Starting the Engine with Key Fob shut off as a reminder to avoid possible Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Battery Run Down or Drained crank delays at the next cold start. Equipped If the ignition does not respond when the When Remote Start is activated, the button is pushed, the key fob battery heated steering wheel and driver heated Caution! might be run down or drained. Therefore, seat features will automatically turn on in the system does not detect the presence cold weather. of the key fob in the vehicle, and will Use of the recommended oil and adhering to These features will stay on through the the prescribed oil change intervals is display a dedicated message. duration of remote start until the ignition important to prevent engine damage and is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. 145 In this case, follow the instructions After Starting — Warming Up The inform about the absence of the key on outlined in "Starting With A Discharged Engine board, only if the doors are closed. Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know Proceed as follows: Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON YourVehicle" chapter, and start the to the STOP position) the accessories are engine normally. Travel slowly, letting the engine run at still powered for about three minutes, or a reduced RPM, without accelerating until a door is opened. suddenly. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF Warning! It is recommended to wait until the mode, the window switches remain active digital engine coolant temperature for three minutes. Opening a front door Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid indicator starts to rise for maximum will cancel this function. into the throttle body air inlet opening in an performance. After severe driving, idle the engine to attempt to start the vehicle. This could allow the temperature inside the engine result in flash fire causing serious personal Stopping The Engine compartment to cool before shutting off injury. To stop the engine, proceed as follows: the engine. Do not attempt to push or tow your Turbocharger Cool Down vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is STARTING AND OPERATING with an automatic transmission cannot be not dangerous for oncoming traffic. It is recommended before switching the started this way. Unburned fuel could enter 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a the catalytic converter and once the engine few minutes so that the turbocharger can has started, ignite and damage the 3. With engine idling, push the be suitably lubricated. This procedure is converter and vehicle. START/STOP button on the steering particularly recommended after severe If the vehicle has a discharged battery, wheel to STOP the engine. driving. booster cables may be used to obtain a Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON After a full load operation, keep the start from a booster battery or the battery engine idling for three to five minutes in another vehicle. This type of start can be mode when the engine is off. dangerous if done improperly. Refer to To shut off the engine with vehicle speed before switching it off. “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must This time allows the lubricating oil and for further information. push and hold the ignition or push the the engine coolant to eliminate the START/STOP button three times excessive heat from combustion consecutively within a few seconds. The chamber, bearings, inner components and Caution! engine will shut down, and the ignition will turbocharger. be placed in the ON mode To prevent damage to the starter, do not With the keyless ignition system, it is continuously crank the engine for more than possible to go away from the vehicle 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds taking the key fob with you, without the before trying again. engine switching off. The vehicle will 146 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF Note: ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE EQUIPPED The engine block heater cord is a The vehicle is equipped with electric park The engine block heater warms the factory installed option. If your vehicle is brake to guarantee better use and engine and permits quicker starts in cold not equipped, heater cords are available optimal performance compared to a weather. from your authorized dealer. manually operated park brake. The electric parking brake features a Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC The engine block heater will require switch located on the center console, a electrical outlet with a grounded, 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate caliper with motor for each rear wheel, three-wire extension cord. the heater element. and an electronic control module. For ambient temperatures below 0°F The engine block heater must be (-18°C), the engine block heater is plugged in at least 1 hour to have a recommended. For ambient warming effect on the engine and at temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the least 4 hours to have a warming effect engine block heater is required. when ambient temperatures are below The engine block heater cord is routed -20 F (-29 C) under the hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater: Warning! 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (access door on the passenger side wiper Remember to disconnect the engine block 0604132227US cowl). heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause Electric Park Brake Switch 2. Pull the cord to the front of the electrocution. The electric parking brake can be vehicle and plug it into a grounded, engaged in two ways: three-wire extension cord. Manually, by pulling the switch on the 3. After the vehicle is running, properly center console. stow away behind access door on the passenger side wiper cowl. Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto Park Brake" conditions.

147 Note: Normally, the electric parking Disengaging The Electric Park Brake brake is engaged automatically when the Manually Caution! engine is stopped. This function can be In order to manually release the park deactivated/activated on the brake, the ignition should be in the ON Information and Entertainment system With the Electronic Parking Brake failure mode. Press the brake pedal, and then by selecting the following items in warning light on, some functions of the push the switch on the center console sequence on the main menu: "Settings", electric parking brake are deactivated. In briefly. this case the driver is responsible for brake "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic Noise may be heard from the rear of the Parking Brake". activation and vehicle parking in complete safety conditions. vehicle, and a slight movement of the In addition to engaging the electric park brake pedal may be detected during brake, along with steering and positioning disengagement. If, under exceptional circumstances, the chocks in front of the wheels (when on a After disengaging the electric parking use of the brake is required with the steep slope), you must always place the brake, the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before instrument panel and the light on the center console pulled as long as the brake leaving. switch will turn off. action is necessary. Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the If the BRAKE warning light on the STARTING AND OPERATING The BRAKE warning light may turn on battery must be replaced in order to instrument panel remains on with the with the hydraulic system temporarily unlock the electric park brake. electric parking brake disengaged, this unavailable; in this case, braking is indicates a fault: in this case, contact an Engaging The Park Brake Manually controlled by the motors. authorized dealer. Briefly pull the switch located on the The brake lights will also automatically center console to manually engage the turn on in the same way as normal braking electric park brake when the vehicle is with the use of the brake pedal. stationary. Warning! Release the switch on the center console Noise may be heard from the rear of the to stop the braking action with the vehicle when engaging the electric vehicle in motion. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or parking brake. with access to an unlocked vehicle. If, through this procedure, the vehicle is A slight movement of the brake pedal braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Allowing children to be in a vehicle may be detected when engaging the (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept unattended is dangerous for a number of electric parking brake with the brake pulled, the park brake will definitively reasons. A child or others could be seriously pedal pressed. engage. or fatally injured. Children should be warned With the electric parking brake engaged, not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or Note: Driving the vehicle with the the gear selector. the BRAKE warning light on the electric parking brake engaged, or using instrument panel and the switch will it several times to slow down the vehicle, illuminate. may cause severe damage to the braking system. 148 Do not leave the key fob in or near the feature can be turned on or off in the The electric park brake engages vehicle or in a location accessible to Information and Entertainment System. automatically to prevent vehicle children. A child could operate power movement if: windows, other controls, or move the Note: If the car is equipped with vehicle. carbon-ceramic brake discs it is The vehicle speed is below 2 mph necessary to fasten the seat belts or turn (3 km/h). Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged off the electric park brake before The driver's seat belt is not fastened. before driving; failure to do so can lead to starting to avoid damages to the ceramic brake failure and a collision. brake discs. The driver side door is open. Always fully apply the park brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is No attempts to apply pressure on the damage or injury. lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear brake pedal have been detected. selector is not in PARK (P) position and The vehicle is parked on roads with a the driver's intention of leaving the slope of more than 4%. Note: Always engage the electric vehicle is detected, the electric park parking brake when parking the vehicle to brake will automatically engage to hold The “Safe Hold” function can be prevent injury or damage caused by the the vehicle in safety conditions. temporarily disabled by pressing the EPB unexpected movement of the vehicle. switch located on the center console and "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed Electric Park Brake Operating Modes the brake pedal at the same time, with is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric the vehicle stationary and the driver side The electric park brake may operate as park brake will automatically engage door open. when the gear selector is in PARK (P) follows: Once disabled, the function will activate position. The light on the switch located again when the vehicle speed reaches "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode on the center console switches on 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled is activated by pulling the switch together with the BRAKE warning light on to STOP and then to ON. repeatedly while driving. the instrument panel when the park brake "Static Engagement and Release is engaged and applied to the wheels. Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the Each automatic park brake engagement electric park brake can be activated by can be cancelled by pressing the switch pulling the switch on the center console on the center console and at the same once. Push the switch and the brake pedal time moving the gear selector for the at the same time to disengage the brake. transmission to position PARK (P). “Drive Away Release" — if equipped: Safe Hold the electric park brake will automatically Safe Hold is a safety function that disengage with the driver side seat belt automatically engages the electric park fastened and the detection of an action brake in the event of a dangerous performed by the driver to move the condition for the vehicle. vehicle (DRIVE [D] or REVERSE [R]). This 149 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION Unintended movement of a vehicle could The vehicle can be equipped with an injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all Caution! electronically controlled 8-speed vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle automatic transmission where gear while the engine is running. Before exiting a shifting automatically takes place, vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission into PARK, and turn the depending on the vehicle usage the following precautions are not observed: ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE instantaneous parameters (vehicle the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is speed, grade, and accelerator pedal only after the vehicle has come to a locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against complete stop. position). unwanted movement. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, The new transmission is an absolute When leaving the vehicle, always make NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is innovation, as it can match the sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, above idle speed. Stop/Start system with the traditional remove the key fob from the vehicle, and automatic transmissions with built-in lock the vehicle. Before shifting into any gear, make sure torque converter. For further Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. information, refer to the “Stop/Start” with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing section within this chapter. children to be in a vehicle unattended is STARTING AND OPERATING Display Manual gear shifting can still occur dangerous for a number of reasons. A child thanks to the "Sequential" mode position or others could be seriously or fatally The following information is shown on the for the gear selector. injured. Children should be warned not to dedicated area of the display: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear Warning! Do not leave the key fob in or near the number. vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or AVVor ON mode. A child could operate the mode (M), the current gear and the NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than power windows, other controls, or move the double or single gear shift request, both idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing vehicle. up and down (single or double arrow). the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

150 07076S0001EM 0604132228US 07076V0005EM Gear Display Gear Selector Center Console Gear Selector Gear Selector 1 — Gear Selector 3 — Gear Selector Button The gear functioning is controlled by the 2 — PARK (P) Button gear selector, which can assume the The gear selector is a joystick style following positions: The letter corresponding to the mode shifting mechanism which returns to the center position automatically. It can be P = PARK selected on the gear selector lights up and appears on the instrument cluster pushed forward twice and rearward R = REVERSE display. twice, based on the starting condition. N = NEUTRAL To select a mode, move the gear selector The PARK (P) mode can be forward or rearward while pressing the enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK D = DRIVE (automatic forward speed) brake pedal. To engage REVERSE (R), (P) button. PARK (P) mode is AutoStick: + manually shift to higher press the brake pedal together with the automatically activated if the following gear; – manually shift to lower gear gear selector button. conditions are met simultaneously: The positions diagram is illustrated on DRIVE (D) mode or REVERSE (R) mode the top of the gear selector. is active The vehicle’s speed is close to 0 mph (0 km/h) The brake pedal is released The driver’s seat belt is not fastened The driver’s door is open

151 To transition the vehicle into REVERSE Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into mode when the vehicle is moving. Before NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing mode, it is necessary to move the gear is engaged (letter P shown on the display the brake pedal, the vehicle could selector by pushing the gear selector and gear selector) and that the park accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. button. brake is engaged. Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear When using AutoStick, activate it by When parking on a flat surface, first when the engine is idling normally and your moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) engage the PARK (P) mode and then foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. to the left and then forward toward the - engage the electric park brake. symbol or backward toward the + symbol When parking uphill, before activating Unintended movement of a vehicle could and the gear is changed. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from park brake. Otherwise, it could be while the engine is running. Before exiting a position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE difficult to engage the (P) mode. vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be To check that the PARK (P) mode is the transmission into PARK, and turn the moving at a low speed or stopped, and actually engaged, make sure (P) is ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in the brake pedal must also be pressed. illuminated on the display and on the gear the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is STARTING AND OPERATING locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against selector. Note: unwanted movement. DO NOT accelerate while shifting When leaving the vehicle, always make from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) Warning! sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, to another position. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. After selecting a gear, wait a few Never use the PARK position as a Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or seconds before accelerating. This substitute for the park brake. Always apply with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing precaution is particularly important with the park brake fully when parked to guard children to be in a vehicle unattended is engine cold. against vehicle movement and possible dangerous for a number of reasons. A child injury or damage. It is not possible to select NEUTRAL or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to (N) mode from PARK (P) mode. Yourvehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by touch the park brake, brake pedal or the Transmission Operating Modes trying to move the gear selector out of transmission gear selector. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make Do not leave the key fob in or near the PARK (P) sure the transmission is in PARK before vehicle (or in a location accessible to The transmission is locked in this mode. leaving the vehicle. children), and do not leave the ignition in the The engine can be started in this mode. ON mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

152 DRIVE (D) Activation Caution! Use this mode in normal driving Starting from DRIVE (D) mode, to conditions. activate the sequential drive mode, move Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or the gear selector to the left (– and + Before moving the transmission gear REVERSE (R) modes must take place indication of the trim). The gear engaged selector out of PARK, you must push the only after releasing the accelerator will be shown on the display. ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and Shifting is made by moving the gear mode to the ON mode, and also press the brake pedal pressed. selector forward, toward symbol – or brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. This mode ensures automatic backward, toward symbol +. engagement of the most suitable gears DO NOT race the engine when shifting Steering Column Mounted Shift for driving needs and maximum fuel Paddles from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear economy in terms of consumption. range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The gear can be manually shifted also by In this position, the transmission shifts using the paddles behind the steering the gears automatically, selecting the wheel, pull the right paddle (+) toward the REVERSE (R) most suitable for forward driving among steering wheel and release it to engage a Select this mode only with the vehicle at those available as you go. In this way the higher gear, perform the same operation a standstill. vehicle's optimal driving characteristics with the left paddle (-) to engage a lower NEUTRAL (N) are provided for all conditions. gear. Use this range when the vehicle is AutoStick standing for prolonged periods with the In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for engine running. The engine may be sport driving, when the vehicle is driven started in this range. Apply the electric with a heavy load, on slopes, when towing park brake and shift the transmission heavy trailers), it is recommended to use into PARK (P) if you must leave the the AutoStick (sequential shifting) mode vehicle. to select and keep a lower fixed ratio. In these conditions, the use of a lower gear improves vehicle performance and Warning! prevents overheating.

It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) 0604132230US Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off mode to AutoStick mode regardless of Steering Column Mounted Shift the ignition to coast down a hill. These are vehicle speed. Paddles unsafe practices that limit your response to Note: If only one manual shift is changing traffic or road conditions. You necessary, the letter (D) will remain on might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. the display with the engaged gear next to it. 153 Deactivation Automatic Transmission Limp Home Note: Even if the transmission can be To deactivate the sequential driving Mode reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest mode, bring the gear selector back in Transmission function is monitored possible convenience. Yourauthorized position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving electronically for abnormal conditions. If dealer has diagnostic equipment to mode). a condition is detected that could result determine if the problem could reoccur. If in transmission damage, Transmission the transmission cannot be reset, service Limp Home Mode is activated. is required at your authorized dealer. Warning! In this condition, the transmission stays in fourth gear, regardless of the selected Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System Do not downshift for additional engine gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) braking on a slippery surface. The drive and NEUTRAL (N) still work. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle The symbol might light up in the Transmission Shift Interlock system could skid, causing a collision or personal instrument cluster. (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in injury. Temporary failure PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. In the event of a momentary problem, the This system prevents you from moving STARTING AND OPERATING Note: transmission can be reset to regain all the gear selector from position PARK (P) To select the correct gear for forward gears by performing the unless the brakes are applied. maximum deceleration (engine brake), following steps: To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the the ignition must be cycled to the ON transmission goes to an operating mode 1. Stop the vehicle. position (engine running or not) and the in which the vehicle can slow down 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), brake pedal must be pressed. easily. if possible. If not, shift the transmission Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock The vehicle will keep the gear to NEUTRAL (N). Disabling selected by the driver until the safety 3. Push and hold the ignition until the Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the conditions allow it. engine turns OFF. vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing This means, for example, that the systems), inhibit the automatic activation 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then system will try to prevent the engine of PARK (P) mode when stopping the restart the engine. from switching off, automatically engine. To do so, follow the directions below: downshifting if the engine speed is too 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If low. the problem is no longer detected, the 1. Bring the vehicle to a standstill. transmission will return to normal operation. 2. Place the transmission in the NEUTRAL (N) position.

154 3. Push the ignition button for at least Do not leave the key fob in or near the three seconds. Warning! vehicle (or in a location accessible to The automatic activation of PARK (P) children), and do not leave the ignition in the when the engine is stopped can also be AVVor ON mode. A child could operate It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or power windows, other controls, or move the deactivated on the Information and vehicle. Entertainment system by selecting the NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than following functions on the main menu: idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Caution! "Automatic Parking Brake". Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit Important Notes someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your Only engage the gear with engine at idling Failure to comply with what is reported foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the below may damage the transmission: Unintended movement of a vehicle could transmission temperature exceeds the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all normal operating limits, the transmission Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the control unit may change the gear vehicle at a standstill. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a engagement order and reduce the drive Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift torque. If the transmission overheats, it from REVERSE to another mode only the transmission into PARK, and turn the could operate incorrectly until it cools down. with the vehicle at a standstill and engine ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in When using the vehicle with extremely idling. the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is low external temperatures, the locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against transmission operation may change Do not change between PARK (P), unwanted movement. depending on the engine and transmission REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) When leaving the vehicle, always make temperature, as well as vehicle speed. modes with engine running at a speed sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, Activation of the torque converter clutch above idling. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the lock the vehicle. transmission oil is correctly warmed up. Before activating any transmission Complete operation of the transmission will operating mode, fully depress the brake Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature pedal. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing reaches the predefined value. children to be in a vehicle unattended is Note: The unexpected movement of the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child vehicle can injure the occupants or or others could be seriously or fatally people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle injured. Children should be warned not to with engine running: before getting out of touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the the passenger compartment always transmission gear selector. engage the electric park brake, select the PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.

155 ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR On the instrument panel display, the Activation different modes are characterized by Alfa DNA Pro System It is activated by rotating the selector to different colors: the letter "n"; the display will light up in This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA Natural - Blue blue. Pro system selector (located on the center console). There are four modes of Dynamic - Red operation to be selected according to Advanced Efficiency - Green driving style and road conditions: RACE - Yellow

07116S0002EM

STARTING AND OPERATING Natural Mode The "Performance" screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely 07076S0004EM Alfa DNA Pro System Selector linked to the efficiency of the driving 07076S0003EM style, with a view to limiting consumption. d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). Mode Display n = Natural (mode for driving in normal Each driving mode is graphically different conditions). in frame color and contents of each individual "performance" screen. a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving mode for maximum fuel savings). Driving Modes RACE = track race driving mode. "Natural" Mode “Natural” Mode is characterized by = Adjusts the calibration of the reduced engine performance and ECO active suspension. shifting strategy for the automatic Unlike the other modes, the RACE transmission. 07116S0001EM position does not latch; therefore, by Natural Mode Performance Display rotating the selector to RACE, it will return to its initial position "d".

156 "Dynamic" Mode "Advanced Efficiency" Mode Activation Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "d"; the display will light up in the letter "a"; the display will light up in red. green.

07116S0006EM Dynamic Mode Performance Display The "Performance" screen displays parameters related to vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations 07116S0003EM 07116S0005EM Dynamic Mode (G-meter information), considering Advanced Efficiency Mode gravity acceleration as a reference unit. ESC and ASR systems: intervention Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, on the right. thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum sportier driving while guaranteeing the safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is stability of the vehicle. advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" Engine and transmission: adoption of mode in the presence of low-grip road sports mapping. surfaces. Engine and transmission: standard response. Warning!

In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

157 The "Performance" screen graphically Engine and transmission: adoption of Note: If the brake system overheats, this displays some parameters closely sports mapping. is communicated by the Information and related to the vehicle consumption. Entertainment system. In this case, allow the system to cool for a few minutes by Warning! driving the vehicle normally without operating the brakes. It is recommended to activate this mode Driving Mode Deactivation at the track. To deactivate any driving mode, simply In "RACE", the sensitivity of the move the selector to any other mode. accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and Note: comfortable. The next time that the engine is started, the "Advanced Efficiency", 07116S0008EM The "Performance" screen displays "Dynamic" and "Natural" mode selected Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance parameters related to vehicle stability, previously is retained. The system will Display the graphs illustrate the trend of the reactivate in "Advanced Efficiency", STARTING AND OPERATING longitudinal/lateral accelerations “RACE” Mode "Dynamic" or "Natural" mode, depending (G-meter information), considering on which mode was selected before the Activation gravity acceleration as a reference unit. engine was stopped. The screen displays the lateral and It is activated by rotating the selector to When the engine is next started, the longitudinal acceleration peaks. position "RACE", the displays light up in "RACE" mode selected previously is not yellow. retained. The system will reactivate in "Dynamic" mode.

05036S0014EM

07116S0004EM RACE Mode Performance Display RACE Mode

158 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION STOP/START SYSTEM Engine stopping is signaled by the (AAS) The Stop/Start system automatically symbol lighting up on the instrument The vehicle's electronic suspension shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop cluster display. management system is aimed at if the required conditions are met. Restarting The Engine optimizing the vehicle's performance. Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator To restart the engine, release the brake The system continuously monitors the pedal will automatically restart the pedal. engine. damping of the suspensions through the With the brake pressed and the actuator installed on each shock The function was developed to increase transmission in automatic mode DRIVE absorber. This way, the calibration of the vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel (D), the engine will restart by shifting to shock absorbers can be adjusted to the consumption, gas emissions, and sound REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to conditions of the road surface and to the pollution. "AutoStick". dynamic conditions of the vehicle, Note: When the Stop/Start system With brake pressed if the gear selector is improving its comfort and road holding. stops the engine, the power steering is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will The driver can choose, even while driving, also disabled. restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by (only in "Dynamic” mode), between two Operating Mode moving the selector to + or -. types of suspension calibration: a more sporty or a more comfortable one. Stopping The Engine System Manual Activation/ By pushing the button, the system With the vehicle at a standstill and brake Deactivation changes the shock absorber calibration. pedal pressed, the engine switches off if To manually activate/deactivate the the gear selector is in a position other system, push the button located in the than REVERSE (R). control panel on the left of the steering The system does not operate when the wheel. gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to make parking maneuvers easier. In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works only with running engine). Note: The engine can only be

0604132232US automatically stopped after having run at Alfa Active Suspension Button about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an automatic restart, the vehicle only needs In case of a system failure, the symbol to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) 07126V0001NA and a dedicated message will be to stop the engine. shown on the instrument panel display. Stop/Start On/Off Button 159 System Activation During the first period of use, to Energy Saving Function initialize the system. The activation of the system is indicated If the driver does not carry out any action by the symbol lighting up on the Steering angle beyond threshold. for more than three minutes after the display. In this condition, the light on the automatic engine restart, the Start/Stop button is off. Engine Restarting Conditions system will switch off the engine in order System Deactivation Due to comfort, emission control, and to prevent fuel consumption. A message will appear on the display safety reasons, the engine can restart In this situation, the engine can only be when the system is deactivated. In this automatically without any action by the restarted using the ignition device. condition, the light on the button is on. driver, under special conditions, such as: Note: It is possible to keep the engine Note: Each time the engine is started, Battery not sufficiently charged. running by deactivating the system. the system is activated regardless of Irregular Operation where was when it was previously Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. switched off. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). In the event of malfunction, the Stop/Start system is deactivated. Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on For failure indications, refer to "Warning Autostop roads with a grade). STARTING AND OPERATING Lights and Messages" paragraph in For higher comfort and increased safety, Engine stopping by the Stop/Start "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel". and to reduce emissions, there are system for more than approx. three Vehicle Inactivity certain conditions where the engine will minutes. not autostop despite the system being With the automatic climate control In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the active, such as: active, an adjustment in cabin heating or battery is replaced), special attention must be paid to the disconnection of the Engine still cold. cooling is made or with MAX-DEF function active. battery power supply. Especially cold outside temperature. Proceed as follows: Safety Functions Battery not sufficiently charged. Remove connector from socket to When the engine is stopped through the disconnect sensor (battery status Driver's door not shut. Stop/Start system, if the driver releases monitoring) installed on the negative pole Driver's seat belt not fastened. their seat belt, opens the driver's or of the battery. This sensor should never passenger's door, or opens the hood from be disconnected from the pole except if Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking inside the vehicle, the engine can be the battery is replaced. maneuvers). restarted only by using the ignition. With the automatic climate control This condition is indicated to the driver active, an adequate cabin heating or both through a buzzer and a message on cooling comfort has not been reached or the instrument cluster display. with MAX-DEF function active. 160 SPEED LIMITER Description This feature allows the speed of the vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can be set by the driver. The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph (30mk/h).

07126V0002EM When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM Battery Power Supply speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display accelerator pedal until the programmed 1 — Socket Speed Limit Programming speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit 2 — Sensor Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed 3 — Connector through the Information and Activation Entertainment System. Note: After setting the ignition to STOP The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, and having closed the driver side door, deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: wait at least one minute before Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter disconnecting the electrical supply from Activating The Device Set Speed". the battery. When reconnecting the To access this feature on the main menu, By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed electrical supply to the battery, make select the following items in sequence: increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a and the driver side door is closed. “ON”. maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed by the displaying of the green symbol By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, along with the last speed set. The Speed the programmed speed can be exceeded Limiter feature can remain active even with the device active (e.g. in the concurrently with the Speed Control event of overtaking). system. If a speed limit below the one indicated in the Speed Control is The device is disabled until the speed selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. function remains available in RACE mode. 161 Programmed Speed Icon Flashing SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE The programmed speed will flash in the CONTROL) Warning! following scenarios: Speed Control Description When the accelerator pedal has been This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the fully pressed and the vehicle has assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. exceeded the programmed speed. desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Yourvehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and Activating the system after setting a without having to press the accelerator pedal. This feature can be used at a speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Control limit below the effective speed of the in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, vehicle. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long icy, snow-covered or slippery. stretches of dry, straight roads with few In the event of overtake acceleration. variations (highways). To Activate Deactivation The speed control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Speed Control System, The feature can be activated/ push the on/off button located on the left Note: deactivated through the Information and side of the steering wheel. STARTING AND OPERATING Entertainment System. To ensure correct operation, the Deactivating The Device speed control is designed to deactivate To access this feature on the main menu, if more than one function is operated select the following items in sequence: simultaneously. In this case, the system "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and can be reactivated by pushing the on/off “OFF”. button and setting the desired speed. Automatic Deactivation Of The Device It is not recommended to use this The device deactivates automatically in feature in city traffic. the event of fault in the system. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set 0403132197US Temporary Signal Loss speed the same. Speed Control On/Off Button When the devices loses the signal, the The activation of the system is signaled white symbol without the speed by the white warning light illuminating indication illuminates on the display. in the instrument cluster display. System Failure The Speed Control function can remain If there is a system failure, the amber active at the same time as the Speed symbol illuminates on the display. Limiter System. If a speed limit below the one indicated in the set speed control is 162 set, the speed control speed will be If needed (when overtaking for instance), decrease speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. you can accelerate beyond the set speed increments. The new speed will then be by pressing the accelerator. When you set. release the pedal, the vehicle goes back Warning! At every movement of the SET switch, to the previously set speed. the set speed will be adjusted. When traveling downhill with the system Note: Moving the SET switch allows the Leaving the Speed Control system on when active, the vehicle speed may slightly driver to adjust the speed according to not in use is dangerous. Youcould exceed the set one. the selected unit of measurement set in accidentally set the system or cause it to go Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the the Information and Entertainment faster than you want. Youcould lose control vehicle must be traveling at a constant System (see dedicated supplement). and have an accident. Always leave the speed on a flat surface. system OFF when you are not using it. Accelerating When Overtaking To VaryThe Speed Setting Press the accelerator as you would Setting The Desired Speed Increasing Speed normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. To set a desired speed, proceed as Once the Speed Control has been follows: activated, the speed can be increased by Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes pushing the SET switch upward. The vehicle can automatically downshift 1. Turn the Speed Control on. Pushing the switch upward to the first to keep the set speed when driving on 2. When the vehicle has reached the detent will increase speed in 1 mph hilly routes. desired speed, push the SET switch up or (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed down and release to activate. When the upward to the second detent will may be considerable and is advisable to accelerator is released, the vehicle will increase speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) deactivate the Speed Control system. maintain the selected speed increments. The new speed will then be Note: The system keeps the speed set automatically. set. even uphill and downhill. A slight variation At every movement of the SET switch, in the speed on slight elevations is the set speed will be adjusted. completely normal. Decreasing Speed When the system is active, to reduce the speed, push the SET switch downward. Pushing the switch downward to the first detent will decrease speed in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch downward to the second detent will

0403132202US Set Switch Location 163 To Resume The Speed To Deactivate ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Note: Before returning to the previously Lightly pressing the brake pedal (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED set speed, you must accelerate to a deactivates the speed control without System Description speed close to the set speed, then push deleting the set speed. and release the RES button. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver The speed control may also be assist system that combines the speed deactivated by applying the electric park control functions with maintaining the brake or when the braking system is distance from the vehicle ahead. operated (e.g. operation of the ESC system). The system allows to set and hold the vehicle at the desired speed without The set speed is deleted in the following needing to press the accelerator. It also cases: allows to set and hold a distance from the Pushing the on/off button twice vehicle ahead (these settings are set by the driver). The ignition is cycled to the STOP position The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system uses a radar sensor located STARTING AND OPERATING 0403132199US There is a malfunction with the Speed Resume Button Location behind the front bumper and a camera Control. located in the center/upper part of the While in Autostick (sequential) mode, windshield, to detect the presence of a before recalling the previously set speed, vehicle close ahead. you should accelerate until you are close to that speed. Then, push and release the RES button.

0403132300US Front Bumper Radar Location

164 recommended to disable the system Cannot take street, traffic, and weather under the following circumstances: conditions into account, and may be limited Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow. upon adverse sight distance conditions. Does not always fully recognize complex Driving in heavy traffic or driving conditions, which can result in wrong construction zones. or missing distance warnings. Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop roads with steep climbs and descents, or while following a target vehicle and hold the roads with numerous turns and bends. vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not Entering a turn lane. 0403132301US start moving within 3 minutes the parking Windshield Camera Location When circumstances do not allow brake will be activated, and the ACC system safe driving at a constant speed. will be canceled. This system enhances driving comfort Youshould switch off the ACC system: while on the highway or out of town with When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy light traffic. Warning! snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex If the sensor does not detect a vehicle driving situations (i.e., in highway ahead, the system will maintain a fixed construction zones). set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a When entering a turn lane or highway off If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the convenience system. It is not a substitute ramp; when driving on roads that are system automatically intervenes by for active driving involvement. It is always winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have braking (or accelerating) slightly in order the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of steep uphill or downhill slopes. keep the set distance while not road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; When circumstances do not allow safe exceeding the original set speed, seeking and, most importantly, brake operation to driving at a constant speed. to adapt to the speed of the vehicle ensure safe operation of the vehicle under ahead. all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention Activation/Deactivation Note: Adaptive Cruise Control is always required while driving to maintain performance is not guaranteed under the safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow The system has four operating states: following circumstances, and it is these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. Enabled (speed not set) The ACC system: Activated (speed set) Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming Paused vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled Deactivated vehicle).

165 Enabling / Activation Note: The system cannot be enabled To enable the system, push and release when RACE mode is active. the (on/off) button located on the left side of the steering wheel. Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. Youcould lose

control and have a collision. Always leave 0403132201US the system off when you are not using it. SET Switch While the accelerator pedal is pressed, Pausing / Deactivating the system will not be able to control the 0403132198US With the system enabled (speed not set), distance between the vehicle and the one

STARTING AND OPERATING On/Off Button push the (on/off) button to disable. ahead. In this case, the speed will be When the system is enabled and ready to With the system active (speed set), push determined only by the position of the operate, the display shows a white the (on/off) button to pause. The accelerator pedal. vehicle icon above dashes in place of the display will show the icon in white with The system will return to normal speed. the speed in brackets. To then deactivate operation as soon as the accelerator the system, push the (on/off) button pedal is released. again. The system cannot be set: Setting The Desired Speed When pressing the brake pedal. The speed can be set from a minimum of When the brakes are overheated. 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 100 mph (160 km/h). When the electric park brake has been When the vehicle reaches the desired operated. speed, push the SET switch upward or When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or downward and release it to activate the NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. system. When the accelerator is released, When the engine rpm is above a 07146S0016EM the vehicle will maintain the set speed Enabled Icons automatically. maximum threshold. Setting a speed activates the system. When the vehicle speed is not within The display shows the icon in green with the operational speed range. the set speed. 166 When the ESC (or ABS or other increase speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) The transmission could change to a stability control systems) are operating increments. The new speed will then be lower gear when driving downhill, or or have just operated. set. when accelerating. This is normal and necessary to maintain the set speed. When the ESC system is off. Decreasing Speed The system will disable while driving When the Forward Collision Warning When the system is active, to reduce the if the brakes overheat. system (if equipped) is braking speed, push the SET switch downward. automatically. Pushing the switch downward to the first Accelerating When Overtaking detent will decrease speed in 1 mph In the event of system failure. (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch When driving with ACC activated and When the engine is OFF. downward to the second detent will following a vehicle, the system will decrease speed by 5 mph (10 km/h) provide an additional acceleration up to In case of obstruction of the radar increments. The new speed will then be the ACC set speed to assist in passing the sensor (in this case the bumper area set. vehicle. This additional acceleration is where it is located must be cleaned). triggered when the driver utilizes the left If the system is set, the conditions Note: turn signal and will only be active when described above also cause a Moving the SET switch allows you to passing on the left hand side. cancellation or deactivation of the adjust the speed according to the The system detects the direction of system. These situations may vary selected unit of measurement ("US" or traffic automatically when the vehicle according to the conditions. "metric") set on the Information and passes from left-hand traffic to Note: The system will not be deactivated Entertainment System (see dedicated right-hand traffic. In this case, the when speeds higher than those set are supplement). overtaking assist function is only active when the reference vehicle is overtaken reached by pressing the accelerator By keeping the accelerator pedal pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In on the right. The additional acceleration depressed, the vehicle can continue to is deactivated when the driver uses the these situations, the system may not accelerate beyond the set speed. In this work correctly and it is recommended to right turn signal and returns to the case, use the SET switch to set the original lane. deactivate it. speed to the vehicle’s current speed. To VaryThe Speed Setting When you push the SET button to Increasing Speed reduce the speed, the braking system Once the Speed Control has been intervenes automatically if the engine activated, the speed can be increased by brake does not slow the vehicle down pushing the SET switch upward. sufficiently to reach the set speed. The device holds the set speed uphill and Pushing the switch upward to the first downhill; however a slight variation is detent will increase speed in 1 mph entirely normal, particularly on slight (1 km/h) increments. Pushing the switch inclines. upward to the second detent will 167 Resuming The Speed Setting The Distance Between Vehicles To Decrease The Distance Once the system has been canceled but The distance between your vehicle and Push and release the distance button to not deactivated, to resume a previously the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar decrease the distance setting. The set speed, simply push the RES button (short), two bars (medium), three bars distance setting decreases by one bar and remove your foot from the (long), or four bars (maximum). (shorter) every time the button is pushed. accelerator to recall it. The system will be set to the last stored speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 0403132203US 07146S0019EM Distance Icons Distance Button The distances from the vehicle ahead are The set speed is held if there are no 0403132200US proportional to speed. vehicles ahead. Once the shortest RES (Resume) Button distance has been selected, the next push The interval of time with relation to the of the button will set the maximum Before returning to the previously set vehicle ahead remains constant and distance. speed, bring the speed close to that varies from one second (for the short speed, then push the RES button and distance one-bar setting) to two seconds If a slower vehicle is detected in the same release it. (for the maximum distance four-bar lane, the vehicle icon on the display setting). illuminates from grey to white. The system automatically adjusts the The set distance is shown on the display vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, Warning! by a dedicated icon. independently of the set speed. The setting is four (maximum) the first The vehicle holds the set distance until: The Resume function should only be used if time the system is used. After the traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming distance has been modified by the driver, The vehicle ahead accelerates to a a set speed that is too high or too low for the new distance will be stored also after speed higher than the set speed. prevailing traffic and road conditions could the system is deactivated and The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate reactivated. too sharply for safe operation. Failure to the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise follow these warnings can result in a collision Control system sensor. and death or serious personal injury. 168 The distance setting is changed. necessary to press the accelerator pedal This could be due to an obstruction of the or push the RES button to restart. vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also The Adaptive Cruise Control system is be due to a fault in the system. If an deactivated/paused. obstruction is detected, clean the area of Warning! the windshield opposite the interior rear view mirror, where the camera is located, Warning! as well as the area of the front bumper When the ACC system is resumed, the driver where the sensor is located. Then check must ensure that there are no pedestrians, that the message has disappeared. The maximum breaking applied by the vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. system is limited. The driver may apply the Failure to follow these warnings can result in When the conditions limiting the system brakes in all cases if needed. a collision and death or serious personal functions end, normal operation will injury. resume. If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to hold the set distance, Should the fault persist, contact your either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is Deactivation authorized dealer. displayed to warn the driver of approaching the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also The system is deactivated and the set Precautions While Driving emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake speed is canceled if: The system may not work correctly in immediately as necessary to hold a safe some driving conditions (see below). The distance from the vehicle ahead. The (on/off) button is pushed (when the system is on or paused). driver must control the vehicle at all The driver is responsible for ensuring that times. there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or The ignition is in STOP mode. objectives along the direction of the vehicle. Vehicle Not Aligned Failure to comply with these precautions RACE mode is activated. The system may not detect a vehicle may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is canceled (the set speed traveling in the same lane, in the same The driver is fully responsible for holding and distance are stored): direction, but is not aligned. It also may not detect a vehicle which is cutting in a safe distance from the vehicle ahead When the system is paused (refer to respecting the highway code in force in the from a side lane. Sufficient distance from the “Activation / Deactivation” section). respective country. the vehicles ahead may not be When the conditions shown in the guaranteed in these cases. “Stop And Go” Function “Setting The Desired Speed” section The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and occur. out of the driving lane causing the vehicle The “Stop and Go” feature allows you to to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. maintain a safe distance from the vehicle Limited Operation Warning ahead until the vehicle has completely If the dedicated message is shown on the stopped. It will also restart the vehicle display, a condition limiting the Adaptive automatically if the vehicle ahead drives Cruise Control operation may have away within two seconds, otherwise it is occurred. 169 Steering And Curves Lane Change Driving on curves with the system set The system may not detect the presence could limit speed and acceleration to of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane. guarantee vehicle stability, even if no vehicles are detected ahead. When leaving the curve, the system resets the previously set speed.

06016V0006EM Small Vehicles Sufficient distance from the vehicles 06016V0007EM ahead may not be guaranteed in these Lane Change cases.

STARTING AND OPERATING In this case, sufficient distance from the Stationary Objects And Vehicles vehicle which is changing lanes may not The system cannot detect the presence 06016V0005EM be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the Steering And Curves of stationary vehicles or objects. For utmost attention at all times and be example, the system will not operate if Note: always ready to apply the brakes if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a needed. In cases of narrow curves, the vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in performance of the system could be Small Vehicles that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all limited. In this case, it is advisable to Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and times and be always ready to apply the deactivate the system. motorcycles) traveling near the outer brakes if needed. edges of the lane or which enter the lane The system only limits the speed Objects And Vehicles Moving In from curb side are not detected until they DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. Opposite Or Crosswise Direction are fully in the lane. The system cannot detect the presence Using The System On Slopes of objects or vehicles traveling in When driving on roads with a variable opposite or crosswise directions and incline, the system may not detect the consequently will not activate. presence of a vehicle in the lane. System performance could be limited according to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes. 170 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM Engagement/Disengagement Vehicles With Front And Rear Parking To turn the system off, push the Park Sensors Sensors System switch located to the left of the headlight switch. The indicator The parking sensors, located in the front light within the switch will illuminate and rear bumpers, detect the presence of when the system is turned off. Pushing any obstacles and warn the driver the switch a second time will turn the through an acoustic signal and visual system back on, and the indicator light indications will be displayed on the will turn off. instrument cluster.

06016V0008EM Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada 07176V0052NA license-exempt RSS standard(s). 0403132299US Park Sensors System On/Off Button Operation is subject to the following two Front Sensor Locations conditions: The indicator light within the Park Sensors System switch will also be on in 1. This device may not cause harmful case of system failure. If the switch is interference. pushed with a system failure, the indicator light will flash for 2. This device must accept any approximately five seconds. The light will interference received, including then stay on constantly. interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: Changes or modifications not state when the engine was stopped expressly approved by the party (activated or deactivated) in its memory. responsible for compliance could void the 0403132302US user’s authority to operate the Rear Sensor Locations equipment. 171 System Activation/Deactivation When the system emits an acoustic If several obstacles are detected When the REVERSE gear is engaged and signal, the volume of the Information and simultaneously in the front and rear area, the system is on, the front and rear Entertainment System, if activated, is the display will show all of them, sensors are activated. If the vehicle automatically lowered. regardless of the area in which they were detected. moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, Indication On Display the rear sensors are deactivated, while In general, the vehicle is closer to the The driver can select the type of warning the front sensors remain active until the obstacle when a single or several flashing they would like to be displayed through speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. arcs are shown on the display and the the Information and Entertainment acoustic signal becomes continuous. Note: In certain operating conditions, the System. To access the function on the system could start detecting an obstacle main menu, select in the following order: It is not possible to exit from the display only after the vehicle has moved slightly screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. (a few inches). 1. “Settings.” Fault Indication Acoustic Signal 2. “Driver Assistance.” Parking sensor faults, if any, will be In the presence of an obstacle at the 3. “ParkSense.” indicated by a message on the display on front or the rear of the vehicle, an the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning

STARTING AND OPERATING acoustic signal with variable frequency 4. “Mode.” Lights And Messages On The Instrument will sound: Panel" in "Getting To Know Your 5. “Sound-Display.” Instrument Panel" for further The acoustic signal increases in Visual Indications information. frequency as the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle decreases. The system indicates the presence of an Messages On The Display obstacle by displaying a single red arc in In case of system failure, a dedicated The acoustic signal becomes the detected areas, in relation to the message appears on the instrument continuous when the distance between distance of the object and the position of cluster for about 5 seconds. the vehicle and the obstacle is less than the vehicle. 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the If the obstacle is detected in the front or Cleaning the front or rear sensors:If distance increases. rear central area, a single red arc will be the display shows a message requiring The acoustic signal is constant if the displayed as the obstacle approaches, the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that distance between the vehicle and the first constant, then flashing, in addition the outer surface and the underside of obstacle is unchanged. to an acoustic signal. the front and rear bumpers are free of debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once Note: If the sensors detect several front If the obstacle is detected in the front or rear left and/or right area, a single red these areas are clear, place the ignition in and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle STOP mode. Then, return it to ON mode. is considered. An intermittent signal will flashing arc will be shown in the corresponding area on the display and If the message is still displayed, contact sound if the obstacles are at the same your authorized dealer. distance (front and rear). the system will emit an acoustic signal, either at frequent intervals or constantly. 172 Audio system not available: If the display shows a message that the audio Warning! Caution! system is not available, it means that the acoustic signal will be emitted by the instrument panel, and not through the Before using the Park Sensors System, it The Park Sensors System is only a vehicles speakers. is strongly recommended that the ball parking aid and it is unable to recognize Note: Some conditions may influence mount and hitch ball assembly is every obstacle, including small obstacles. disconnected from the vehicle when the the performance of the Park Sensors Parking curbs might be temporarily vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do detected or not detected at all. Obstacles System: so can result in injury or damage to vehicles located above or below the sensors will not Reduced sensor sensitivity could be or obstacles because the hitch ball will be be detected when they are in close due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or much closer to the obstacle than the rear proximity. fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the thick paint on the surface of the sensor. continuous tone. Also, the sensors could The vehicle must be driven slowly when The sensors may detect a false detect the ball mount and hitch ball using the Park Sensors System in order to assembly, depending on its size and shape, be able to stop in time when an obstacle is obstacle (echo interference) due to detected. It is recommended that the driver mechanical interference, for example giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. looks over his/her shoulder when using the when washing the vehicle or in extreme Park Sensors System. weather. Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park Sensors System. The signals sent by the sensors can Always check carefully behind your vehicle, be altered by the presence of ultrasonic look behind you, and be sure to check for systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the obstructions, and blind spots before vehicle. backing up. Youare responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your System performance can be surroundings. Failure to do so can result in influenced by the position of the serious injury or death. sensors. For example, due to a change in the ride setting (caused by wear to the shock absorbers or suspension), by changing tires, overloading the vehicle or operations that require the vehicle to be lowered. Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other adhesives over the sensors as this will affect system performance.

173 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING System Activation/Deactivation (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Caution! The system is activated/deactivated by Description pushing the button located on the end of the multifunction lever. The Lane Departure Warning system uses Do not tamper with nor operate on the a forward looking camera located on the camera. Do not close the openings in the windshield to detect lane markings and aesthetic cover located under the interior measure vehicle position within the lane rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of boundaries. the camera, contact your authorized dealer. When one or both lane limits are The camera may have limited or absent detected and the vehicle passes over one operation due to weather conditions such without an activated turn signal, the as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, system emits a visual as well as an formation of ice layers on the windshield. acoustic signal. Camera operation may also be If the vehicle continues to go beyond the compromised by the presence of dust, line of the lane without any intervention condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, 07226S0001EM STARTING AND OPERATING from the driver, the surpassed line will by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are Lane Departure Warning System light up on the display (left or right) to driving not aligned with yours, vehicle Activation/Deactivation Button driving in a transverse or opposite way on urge the driver to bring the vehicle back the same lane, bend with a small radius of Note: When the engine is started, the into the limits of the lane. curvature), by road surface conditions and system maintains the operating mode by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). that was selected when it was turned Make sure the windshield is always clean. OFF. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield. The camera Activation Conditions operation may also be limited or absent in Once turned on, the system becomes some driving, traffic and road surface active only if the following conditions are conditions. met: If the windshield must be replaced due to The vehicle speed is above 37 mph scratches, chipping or breakage, contact (60 km/h) (the system is deactivated at exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own. It is speeds equal to or greater than 110 mph advisable to replace the windshield if it is (180 km/h). damaged in the area of the camera. The lane limit lines are visible at least on one side. There are suitable visibility conditions. 174 The road is straight or with wide radius When the system detects that the vehicle bends. has approached the lane line and is about to pass it, the left line on the display A suitable distance is kept from the illuminates in yellow. vehicle in front. The turn signal is not active. Symbols And Messages On The Display The Lane Departure Warning system advises the driver when the vehicle leaves the driving lane by showing 07226S0007EM symbols and messages on the instrument Lane Limits Not Detected cluster display. Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit When the system is active and only, for 07226S0004EM Left Lane Limit Approached example, the left lane limit has been detected, the detected lane illuminates in The system operates in the same way, white on the display. The system is then but mirrored, in the event of exiting the ready to provide visual warnings on the right lane when only the right lane limit display in the event of unintentional has been detected. exiting of the lane (turn signal not Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both activated) to the left. Limits

07226S0002EM When the system is active, both lane lines Vehicle Changing Lanes on the display illuminate in white to indicate the successful detection of both When the system is active and the lane limits. limits have not been detected, the display shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey lines.

07226S0003EM Left Lane Limit Detected

175 If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by When the conditions limiting the system an audible signal as well as the visual are corrected, it will go back to normal indication in the instrument cluster. The operation. Should a fault persist, contact signal is emitted through the speakers on an authorized dealer. the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding the left line of the lane, the audible signal If the system turns off and appears on will come from the speakers on the left of the display, it means that there is a the vehicle). system fault. In this case, it is still possible to drive the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact an 07226S0005EM The system's sensitivity can be set authorized dealer as soon as possible. Both Lane Limits Detected through the Information and When lane limits are detected, the Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” system is ready to provide indications in or “Low” can be selected. case the driver unintentionally leaves the To access the function, from the main

STARTING AND OPERATING lane (turn signal not activated). menu select the following in order: As the Lane Departure Warning system 1. “Settings.” detects the lane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display 2. “Safety.” accordingly (from white to yellow and 3. “Lane Departure Warning.” yellow to white, and increase their thickness). 4. “Sensitivity.” Limited Operation Warning If a message appears on the display, a condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have occurred. This could be an obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the system. If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield by the interior rear view mirror. Although the vehicle can still be driven in 07226S0006EM Right Lane Limit Approached normal conditions, the system may not function properly. 176 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / Rear Back-Up Camera Features DYNAMIC GRIDLINES To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera Caution! features, select “Settings” from the Main Description Menu of the Information and The Rear Back-Up Camera is located on Entertainment System. Under “Driver To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up the liftgate, above the rear license plate. Assistance”, Rear Back-Up Camera Camera should only be used as a parking features can be selected: aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive View path. Camera Delay To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must Dynamic Grid Lines be driven slowly when using the Rear Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time Selecting “View” will activate the camera when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended view on the display. that the driver look frequently over his/her Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. camera view to remain on the display shortly after the vehicle is no longer in 07186V0001EM REVERSE, followed by the previously Symbols And Messages On The Display Rear Back-Up Camera Location active screen. Indications On The Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will Through the Information and Information and Entertainment System activate the display of the dynamic Entertainment System settings, by display will show the area behind the guidelines that indicate the route of the activating the "Camera Guidelines" vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up vehicle. feature, guidelines can be seen on the Camera, along with a warning message. rear camera display. If activated, the guidelines are positioned on the image to Warning! highlight the width of the vehicle and the expected reverse path based on the Drivers must be careful when backing up steering wheel position. even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. The various colored areas indicate the Always check carefully behind your vehicle, distance from the rear of the vehicle. and be sure to check for pedestrians, The table below shows the approximate animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. Youare distances for each area: responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay 07186V0002EM attention while backing up. Failure to do so Rear Back-Up Camera Display can result in serious injury or death. 177 REFUELING THE VEHICLE Opening The Fuel Filler Door Distance From The Area To refuel proceed as follows: Rear Of The Vehicle Refueling The Vehicle 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on 0–11.8 inches Before refueling, make sure that the fuel Red the point shown by the arrow. (0–30 cm) type is correct. Also, stop the engine before refueling. 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet Yellow (30cm–1m) Note: An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus 3.3 feet or more Green contributing to air pollution. (1 m or more)

Messages On The Display Caution! If the liftgate is opened, the camera will not detect any obstacle behind the Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, vehicle. The display will show a dedicated even in small amounts in an emergency, as warning message. this would damage the catalytic converter 0405133008US STARTING AND OPERATING Make sure the liftgate is closed by beyond repair. Fuel Door pushing next to the lock until it clicks. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. Important Notes Refueling Capacity 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the To ensure that you fill the tank filler pipe. camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is completely, top off twice after the first important to keep the camera surface click of the fuel nozzle. 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts clean, and free from debris. Further top-off could cause faults in the off, before removing the nozzle, wait for fuel feeding system. at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel When parking, be aware of obstacles to flow inside the tank. that may be above or below the camera Refueling Procedure range. The fuel filler door is unlocked when the 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten central door locking system is unlocked. the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear It is automatically locked when the one click. This is an indication that cap is central locking system is applied. properly tightened. The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).

178 2. Lift up the cover to reach the emergency opening cable on the side of the fuel door.

0620132793US Fuel Door Label Emergency Fuel Door Opening 07226V0041EM In the event of an emergency, the fuel Cargo Box filler door can be opened from inside the liftgate. 1 — Cover Proceed as follows: Models Without Compact Spare Tire 3. Pull the cable to release the fuel door lock. 1. Open the liftgate and lift up the load 07226V0043EM floor. Cargo Box Opened 2 — Release Cable

4. Open the fuel door by pressing it.

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open 0604132234US or the tank is being filled. Load Floor

179 Never add fuel when the engine is running. VEHICLE LOADING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This is in violation of most state and federal Certification Label fire regulations and may cause the MIL to The GAWR is the maximum permissible turn on. As required by National Highway Traffic load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so A fire may result if gasoline is pumped Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to that the GAWR of each axle is not into a portable container that is inside of a exceeded. vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place the driver's side door or pillar. gas containers on the ground while filling. This label contains the month and year of Each axle GAWR is determined by the manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, Note: If the filler compartment is Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or washed with a pressure washer, keep it at suspension components sometimes a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is specified by purchasers for increased included on this label and indicates the durability does not necessarily increase Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The the vehicle's GVWR. bar code that appears on the bottom of Tire Size STARTING AND OPERATING the label is your VIN. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Label represents the actual tire size on (GVWR) your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, Rim Size passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum This is the rim size that is appropriate for capacities of front and rear axle systems the tire size listed. (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Inflation Pressure GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up Payload to full GAWR. The payload of a vehicle is defined as the Curb Weight allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as passengers, options and cargo. the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no 180 occupants or cargo loaded into the SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING vehicle. The front and rear curb weight Caution! values are determined by weighing your Saving Fuel vehicle on a commercial scale before any Below are some suggestions which may occupants or cargo are added. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the help you save fuel and lower the amount GVWR or the maximum front and rear of harmful emissions released into the Loading GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can atmosphere. The actual total weight and the weight of break, or it can change the way your vehicle Vehicle Maintenance handles. This could cause you to lose control. the front and rear of your vehicle at the Also overloading can shorten the life of your Checks and operations should be carried ground can best be determined by vehicle. out in accordance with the Maintenance weighing it when it is loaded and ready Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in for operation. "Servicing And Maintenance" for further The entire vehicle should first be weighed information. on a commercial scale to insure that the Tires GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the Check the tire pressures at least once vehicle should then be determined every four weeks: if the pressure is too separately to be sure that the load is low, consumption levels increase as properly distributed over the front and resistance to rolling is higher. rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show Note: Tire pressure that is too high can that the GAWR of either the front or rear cause premature tire wear, reduced axles has been exceeded but the total control, etc. load is within the specified GVWR. If so, Unnecessary Loads weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the Do not travel with an overloaded liftgate. specified weight limitations are met. The weight of the vehicle and its Store the heavier items down low and be arrangement greatly affect fuel sure that the weight is distributed consumption and stability. equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

181 Electric Devices Unnecessary Actions Traffic And Road Conditions Use electrical systems only for the Avoid revving up when starting at traffic High fuel consumption is caused by heavy amount of time needed. The rear window lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic, for instance when travelling in defroster, additional headlights, action is unnecessary and causes traffic with frequent use of low gears or windshield wipers and heater blower fan increased fuel consumption and in cities with many traffic lights. Winding require a considerable amount of energy; pollution. mountain roads and rough road surfaces increasing the current uptake increases also adversely affect consumption. Gear Selection fuel consumption (by up to +25% when Stops In Traffic city driving). Use a high gear when traffic and road conditions allow it. Using a low gear for During prolonged stops (e.g. railway Climate Control System faster acceleration will increase fuel crossings), turn off the engine. Using the climate control system will consumption. Improper use of a high gear Performance increase consumption: use standard increases consumption, emissions and ventilation when the temperature engine wear. This vehicle is equipped with an engine outside permits. capable of delivering exceptionally fast Max. Speed acceleration and speed: Devices For Aerodynamic Control Fuel consumption considerably increases STARTING AND OPERATING Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 rpm. The use of non-certified devices for as speed increases. Maintain a constant aerodynamic control may adversely speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at affect air drag and consumption levels. acceleration, which cost in terms of both 2500–5000 rpm. fuel consumption and emissions. Driving Style Top speed: 177 mph (285 km/h). Acceleration Starting Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to Accelerating violently severely affects Do not warm up the engine at low or high 100 km/h): 3.9 seconds. consumption and emissions: acceleration revs when the vehicle is stationary; this should be gradual and should not exceed For safe driving, it is essential, causes the engine to warm up more the maximum torque. particularly during the first days of use, slowly, thereby increasing fuel to get to know the car by driving carefully consumption and emissions. It is Conditions Of Use and gradually discovering its therefore advisable to drive off Cold Starting performance. immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds: by doing this the engine will Short trips and frequent cold starts will warm up more quickly. not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. This results in a significant increase in consumption levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) and emissions.

182 Brakes In case of intensive, high-performance Brake nine times from 80 mph to The car braking system may be available use of the car, have the efficiency of the 18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with with four carbon-ceramic material brake carbon-ceramic material braking system deceleration equal to 0.7g (the discs, one on each wheel. inspected as shown on the Maintenance longitudinal acceleration value is shown In order to guarantee the maximum Plan at your authorized dealer. on the instrument panel display by setting RACE mode and selecting the braking capacity for the first use, Alfa Driving On Race Tracks “Performance” page) with 20 second Romeo performs a "run-in" procedure for Before driving on a track using a racing discs and pads directly at the factory. intervals between brake applications; style, it is necessary to: keep the car at a speed comprised The use of carbon-ceramic material Attend a race track driving course. between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h brake discs guarantees braking features and 100 km/h) and do not brake for (better deceleration/pedal load ratio, Check the liquid levels in the engine 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool braking distances, fading resistance) compartment. For more information, see down; proportional to the dynamic features of the “Checking Levels” section in the the car in addition to considerably “Servicing And Maintenance” chapter. Then brake three times from 124 mph decreasing the unsprung component to 18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with weight. Have the car inspected at an deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS authorized dealer. The materials used and the structural operation) with 30 second intervals features of the system could generate Remember that the car was not designed between brake applications; keep the car unusual noises which have absolutely no to be driven exclusively on the race track at a speed comprised between 37 mph adverse effect on correct operation and and that this use increases stress and and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and reliability of the braking system. component wear. do not brake for 5 minutes to allow the brakes to cool down. Greater pressure may need to be applied Note: Quadrifoglio front brakes are to the brake pedal the first time to keep equipped with NAO type pads the same braking capacities in presence (Non-Asbestos Organic). These pads are of condensation or salt on the braking NOT suitable for high thermal loads (for surfaces, for example after washing or if example track use). If you want to use the car is not used for a long time. vehicle on a track it is recommended to Note: Given the high technological level use the optional CCM Brakes (Carbon of this system, any servicing on it must be Ceramic Brake disc). performed by your authorized dealer Preheating the carbon ceramic material which exclusively has the skills needed brake discs for the repair and maintenance The brake discs must be warmed up to operations. make them fully efficient. Youare advised to perform the following procedure to achieve optimal efficiency: 183 This page is intentionally left blank

184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....186 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 186 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 191 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 198 The section on emergencies can help you JUMP STARTING ...... 201 to deal with critical situations ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 203 independently. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .204 In an emergency, we recommend that you TOW EYES ...... 205 call the phone number found in the ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Warranty Book. SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 206 Youmay also consider contacting an EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .206 authorized dealer.

185 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BULB REPLACEMENT The Hazard Warning flasher switch is Caution! General Instructions located in the switch bank below the Before replacing a bulb, check the radio screen. Prolonged use of the hazard warning contacts for oxidation. Push the switch once to flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery. turn the hazard warning Replace blown bulbs with others of the flasher on. When the same type and power. Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System switch is activated, all After replacing a headlight bulb, directional turn signals The PBA system is designed to improve always check its alignment. will flash on and off to the vehicle’s braking capacity during warn oncoming traffic emergency braking. When a light is not working, check that of an emergency. Push the switch a For further details about the Panic Brake the corresponding fuse is intact before second time to turn the hazard warning Assist System, refer to the "Active changing the bulb. For the location of flashers off. Safety Systems" section in the "Safety" fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY This is an emergency warning system and chapter. Note: In some particular climate it should not be used when the vehicle is conditions, such as low temperature, in motion. Use it when your vehicle is humidity, or after washing the vehicle, a disabled and is creating a safety hazard thin condensation layer may form on the for other motorists. internal surfaces of the front and rear When you must leave the vehicle to seek headlights. This condensation will assistance, the hazard warning flashers disappear after switching on the will continue to operate even though the headlights. ignition is cycled to STOP.

0403132206US Hazard Warning Switch 186 Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

187 Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators (*) PY24W 24W Rear Fog lights(*) H11 55 W Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights (DRL) H15 55/15W (*) Dipped beam headlights (*) H7 55W Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Glove compartment light W5W 4W Liftgate light W5W 5W Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W (*) Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights

188 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is Warning! locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. Only replace bulbs when the engine is off. Also ensure that the engine is cold, to Front Light Cluster With Main Beam prevent the risk of burns. Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights To replace the bulbs of the main beam headlights, contact an authorized dealer. Front Light Cluster 08026V0006EM Direction Indicators Protective Cover Caution! Proceed with the directions below to 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly change bulbs: counterclockwise, and then slide it off the headlight body. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. 1. Operating inside the engine Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb compartment, locate the protective life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily cover. surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

08026V0007EM Bulb/Connector

08026V0023EM 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the Protective Cover Location bulb holder. 2. Remove protective cover. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

189 Replacing Interior Bulbs 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights using a suitable tool. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: 1. Open the liftgate, and remove the liftgate lamp assembly using a suitable 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the tool. lens, using a suitable tool.

08026V0009EM Courtesy Lamp Indent IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Open protective cover up and remove the bulb pulling out of the connector. 08026V0010EM 0604132233US Ceiling Light Indent Sun Visor 2. Open protective cover up and remove 1 — Mirror Cover the bulb pulling out of the connector. 2 — Lens

2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened between the contacts.

3. Install the lens, inserting it first on one 08026S0011EM side and then pressing on the other side Cover And Bulb Removal Direction until it clicks into place. 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is Glove Compartment Light correctly inserted fully. 08026S0011EM To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 1. Open the glove compartment. 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is on one side and then pressing on the correctly inserted fully. other side until it clicks into place. 190 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. FUSES 5. Install liftgate lamp in the correct General Information position, inserting it first on one side, and The fuses protect electrical systems then pressing on the other side until it against excessive current. clicks into place. When a device does not work, you must Puddle Lights On Door Panel check the electrical circuit inside of the To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power 1. Open the door and remove the puddle outlets for extended periods of time with light assembly, using a suitable tool. 08026S0011EM the engine off may result in vehicle Cover And Bulb Removal Direction battery discharge. 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it first on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place.

08026V0012EM Puddle Light Indent 08036S0001EM 2. Open protective cover up and remove Blade Fuses the bulb pulling out of the connector. 1 — Electrical Circuit 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit

191 Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them, and extract the pliers pulling Warning! upwards. The pliers have two different ends, both of which are specifically designed to When replacing a blown fuse, always use remove the different types of fuses an appropriate replacement fuse with the present in the vehicle: same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity

08036S0002EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses J-CASE Fuse may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 1 — Electrical Circuit Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the ignition is off and that all the other cuit services are switched off and/or 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- disengaged. cuit 08036S0005EM If the replaced fuse blows again, contact Fuse Extracting Pliers an authorized dealer. Fuse Extracting Pliers 1 — MINI fuse If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked 2 — J-CASE fuse to the fuse box. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system After use, return the pliers to their proper blows, contact an authorized dealer. position by following the below procedures: Fuse Location Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs The fuses, which can be replaced by the and insert them into their housing. user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the Push downward on the pliers into their luggage compartment. housing until they click into place.

08036V0053EM Fuse Box

192 Control Unit Under Passenger Side 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove Luggage Compartment Fuse Box Footboard the panel pulling downward. To access the fuses, proceed as follows: To access the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the 2. Remove the control unit cover. two buttons.

08036V0011EM Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel 08036V0014EM Control Unit 08036V0010EM The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. The fuses are freely accessible on the Release Buttons On Footboard After replacing the fuse, make sure that control unit. 1 — Footboard panel and footboard are correctly locked. The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have closed the cover correctly.

193 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit

194 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver’s side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, alarm, power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), doors F38 20 unlock, central lock Windshield washer pump F43 20 Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15

195 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036V0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit

196 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE Receiver module (TTM/TTEBM) F01 40 Hi-Fi system F08 30 I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power socket in the luggage compartment F22 20 Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F1 20 Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F2 15 Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30) F3 10 Tow bar (+15) F4 10

197 TIRE SERVICE KIT Description If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage area under the load platform. 1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can repair the tire safely. Youshould be as far as possible from the side of the road, and in a position that is not 0403132214US 08066V0002EM dangerous for oncoming traffic. Turn on Load Floor Tire Service Kit Components the hazard warning flashers, remove the The Tire Service Kit consists of: 1 — Sealant Cartridge safety triangle from the luggage 2 — Filling Hose IN CASE OF EMERGENCY compartment, and place it at a suitable Sealant cartridge containing the 3 — Adhesive Label distance from the vehicle to make other sealing fluid 4 — Air Compressor drivers aware of your presence. Filler Tube 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the Air compressor, complete with Note: wheel with the deflated tire) is in a pressure gauge and connectors position that is near to the ground. This The sealing fluid is effective with will allow the tire repair kit hoses to reach Adhesive label with the writing "Max. external temperatures of between the valve stem and keep the tire service 50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). kit flat on the ground. position easily visible to the driver (eg. on the dashboard) after repairing the tire The sealing fluid has an expiration 3. Place the gear selector in PARK (P). date. An instruction pamphlet for reference 4. Apply the electric park brake and turn in prompt and correct use of the Tire Inflation Procedure the engine OFF. Service Kit, which must be then given to To access the Tire Service Kit, open the the personnel dealing with the liftgate and lift the load floor. sealant-treated tire Warning! A pair of protective gloves Some adaptors, for inflating different Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side elements of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. 198 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 3. Make sure the power switch of the vehicle under the following circumstances: latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, compressor is in the off position (O). consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire If the puncture in the tire tread is Service Kit out of reach of children. If 4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with the center console, then start the engine. If the tire has any sidewall damage. plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician If the tire has any damage from driving immediately. with extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from driving on To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as a flat tire. follows: If the wheel has any damage. 1. Apply the electric park brake. If you are unsure of the condition of the 2. Connect the hose to the sealant tire or the wheel. cartridge containing the sealing liquid. Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the flames or heat sources. filler tube and tighten the fitting on the 08066V0006EM tire valve. Inserting Plug Into Outlet A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the 5. Start the compressor by placing the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the power switch in the on position (I). Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately 08066V0004EM with plenty of water if there is any contact Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon 1 — Sealant Cartridge as possible, if there is any contact with 08066V0005EM clothing. 2 — Filler Hose Air Compressor 4 — Air Compressor 7 — Power Switch 5 — Hose 8 — Pressure Gauge 6 — Sealant Cartridge Connector

199 6. Inflate the tire to a pressure of at Note: Only use original sealant least 32 psi (2.2 bar). Refer to “Tires” in cartridges, which can be purchased at an Warning! “Servicing And Maintenance” for more authorized dealer. information. In order to obtain a more Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure precise reading, check the pressure value Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire on pressure gauge with the compressor repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired The compressor can also be used to off. or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do check and, if necessary, restore the tire not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is pressure. 7. If the pressure is not at least 26 psi repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this Proceed as follows: (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the warning can result in injuries that are serious compressor from the valve and power or fatal to you, your passengers, and others 1. Make sure that the power switch is in outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards around you. Have the tire checked as soon as the O (off) position. approximately five tire turns in order to possible at your authorized dealer. distribute the sealing fluid inside the tire 2. Connect the hose directly to the valve evenly, and then repeat the inflation 11. Apply the adhesive label from the on the tire to be inflated. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY operation. sealant bottle where it can be easily seen 3. Insert the plug into the socket in the 8. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles by the driver as a reminder that the tire passenger compartment or in the cargo (8 km), stop, engage the electric park has been treated with a Tire Service Kit, area and start the engine. brake, and recheck the tire pressure. as well as not to exceed the speed restriction for the treated tire. 4. Start the compressor by putting the 9. If the pressure is less than 19 psi power switch to I (on). As soon as the (1.3 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and correct pressure is reached, put the see an authorized dealer. Warning! power switch to O (off). 10. If a pressure value of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) is detected, restore the correct Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker pressure (with engine running and to the padded area on the steering wheel. electric park brake engaged), and drive Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is immediately with great care to an dangerous because the air bag may not authorized dealer. operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed.

200 JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Note: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's 08066V0008EM operating instructions and precautions. 08146V0001EM Air Compressor And Components Remote Negative Post Location 5 — Hose Warning! 7 — Power Switch Warning! 8 — Pressure Gauge 9 — PSI/BAR Button Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or Do not connect the jumper cable to the property damage due to battery explosion. negative (-) post of the discharged battery. If the tire is over inflated, reduce the The resulting electrical spark could cause pressure by pushing the PSI/BAR button the battery to explode and could result in and releasing it when the correct Caution! serious injury. Only use the specific ground pressure is reached. point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

Remote Battery Connection Posts The remote posts of the battery for jump starting can be found inside the engine compartment. The battery itself is located in the luggage compartment. The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock. 201 The positive post (+) can be accessed by Jump Starting Procedure Cable Connection removing the cover, and opening the Proceed as follows to perform a jump protective flap. starting procedure: Warning! 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of Failure to follow this jump-starting the vehicle with the discharged battery procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Caution! 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of Failure to follow these procedures could the booster battery. 08146V0002EM result in damage to the charging system of IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Protective Flap the booster vehicle or the discharged 4. Connect the opposite end of the vehicle. negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, place Warning! the gear selector to PARK, then cycle the ignition to OFF. Do not connect the jumper cable to the 2. Turn off all electrical features in the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. vehicle. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in 3. If using another vehicle to jump start 0403142698US serious injury. Only use the specific ground Remote Positive Post Location the battery, park the vehicle within the point, do not use any other exposed metal jumper cables reach, apply the parking parts. To carry out the operation, you need to brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. have the correct cables to connect to the battery of another vehicle or a portable 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a battery booster pack to the remote posts Warning! of the discharged battery. Usually, these few minutes, and then start the engine in cables have terminals at the ends and are the vehicle with the discharged battery. If identified by different sheath colors (red Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as using a portable battery booster pack, = positive, black = negative). this could establish a ground connection and before starting the vehicle, wait a few personal injury could result. seconds after completing the connection. 202 Cable Disconnection Bump Starting ENGINE OVERHEATING Once the engine is started, remove the Never jump start the engine by pushing, Engine overheating may occur in connection cables in reverse sequence, towing or coasting downhill. Youcannot situations such as (but not limited to) as described below: start a vehicle with an automatic extreme environmental temperatures or frequent engine stops/starts. If the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the transmission by pushing it. engine becomes overheated, the Engine jumper cable from the remote negative (-) TemperatureWarning Light in the post of the vehicle with the discharged Caution! instrument cluster will illuminate along battery. with a dedicated message. Refer to 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power "Warning Lights And Messages On The jumper cable from the negative (-) post of outlets draw power from the vehicle’s Instrument Panel" in the "Getting To the booster battery. battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular Know YourInstrument Panel" for more phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long information. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the enough without engine operation, the In any of the following situations, you can positive (+) jumper cable from the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently reduce the potential for overheating by positive (+) post of the booster battery. to degrade battery life and/or prevent the taking the appropriate action. engine from starting. 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the On the highways — slow down. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not If frequent jump starting is required to increase engine idle speed. start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at Note: There are steps that you can take an authorized dealer. to slow down an impending overheat condition: Caution! If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power A/C off can help remove this heat. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular Youcan also turn the temperature phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long control to maximum heat, the mode enough without engine operation, the control to floor and the blower control to vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently high. This allows the heater core to act to degrade battery life and/or prevent the as a supplement to the radiator and aids engine from starting. in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 203 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Alarm System — If Equipped” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further Warning! This section describes procedures for information. towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. The operators of the assistance vehicle Youor others can be badly burned by hot must be informed with regard to the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from vehicle's minimum height from ground in your radiator. If you see or hear steam Caution! order to avoid contact between the ends coming from under the hood, do not open the of the bumpers with the equipment of the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. breakdown truck. Never try to open a cooling system pressure The vehicle should be transported with all cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed The following image illustrates the front hot. of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid and rear attachment corners of the towing with only the front (or rear) wheels vehicle, to be taken into consideration lifted. When towing with only the front (or when loading the vehicle on the Caution! rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging commercial towing vehicle. the body, it could damage the transmission. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Do not use sling-type equipment when Driving with a hot cooling system could towing. Vehicle damage may occur. damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle When securing the vehicle to a flatbed the vehicle with the air conditioner turned truck, do not attach to front or rear off until the pointer drops back into the suspension components. Damage to your normal range. If the pointer remains on the vehicle may result from improper towing. “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remain released, while being towed. Note: Damage from improper towing is not 0434132125US If the cooling fan does not operate covered under the New Vehicle Limited Front And Rear Loading Angles while the engine is running, the engine Warranty. temperature will increase. Stop the engine and contact an authorized dealer. Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a If the engine continues to overheat or Anti-Lift Protection system, you will need frequently overheats, have the cooling to disable the system prior to towing by system inspected. The engine could be pushing the button located on the seriously damaged unless repairs are overhead console. Refer to ”Security made. Contact an authorized dealer. 204 Quadrifoglio Models A — Front Loading Angle 20.8° B — Rear Loading Angle 21.0°

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models TOW EYES 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the luggage compartment and carefully It is recommended to tow the vehicle If the vehicle has been in an accident or clean the threaded housing on the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on has broken down, a tow eye is provided in before using it. the flatbed of a commercial towing the tools container located inside the vehicle. luggage compartment for vehicle towing. 3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place Two locations in the front grille are (about 11 turns). available for Tow Eye installation. Towing Note: The largest work angle of a tow Caution! is meant only for short distances on a cable to fix on the tow eye must not paved road surface. exceed 15°. DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: the drivetrain will result. 1. Unhook the cap on the left or right DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a side of the front grille, pushing on the towing dolly can cause significant damage upper part. to your vehicle. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

0434132126US Work Angle Of Tow Cable

0403132305US Warning! Front Tow Eye Cap Locations

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes. Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. 205 Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) straps may break or become disengaged, RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event causing serious injury or death. This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Failure to follow proper tow eye usage Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will may cause components to break resulting in assist in understanding how a vehicle’s serious injury or death. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further systems performed under certain crash information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road Caution! obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint The tow eye must be used exclusively for Systems” in “Safety” for further roadside assistance operations. Only use information on the Event Data Recorder the tow eye with an appropriate device in (EDR). accordance with the highway code (a rigid

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service location. Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles. In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

206 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 208 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 212 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 215 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 216 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 222 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 223 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .239 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 240 BODYWORK...... 241 INTERIORS ...... 242

207 SCHEDULED SERVICING Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see Check cleanliness of hood and liftgate Correct servicing is crucial for your authorized dealer as soon as locks, cleanliness and lubrication of guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle possible). linkage. under the best conditions. Windshield washer fluid level. Visually inspect conditions of: engine, For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned transmission, pipes and hoses Tire inflation pressure and condition. a series of checks and services for your (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber vehicle at fixed intervals based on Operation of lighting system elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). distance and time, as described in the (headlights, direction indicators, hazard Check battery charge and battery fluid Scheduled Servicing Plan. warning lights, etc.). level (electrolyte). Before each service, it is always Operation of windshield Visually inspect conditions of the necessary to carefully follow the washing/wiping system and accessory drive belts. instructions in the Scheduled Servicing positioning/wear of wiper blades. Plan (e.g. periodically check level of Check and, if necessary, change engine fluids, tire pressure, etc.). Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and top off if required: oil and replace oil filter. Scheduled Servicing is offered by an authorized dealer according to a set time Engine oil level. Check and, if necessary, replace cabin schedule. If, during each operation, in air filter. addition to the ones scheduled, the need Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle Check and, if necessary, replace air SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE arises for further replacements or If the vehicle is used under one of the cleaner. repairs, these may be carried out with the following conditions: Severe Duty All Models owner’s explicit consent only. Dusty roads. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a required by the manufacturer. Failure to Short, repeated journeys less than dusty and off-road environment or is have them carried out may invalidate the 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside operated predominately at idle or only New Vehicle Limited Warranty. temperatures. very low engine RPM’s. This type of Youare advised to inform your Engine often idling or driving long vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. authorized dealer of any small operating distances at low speeds or long periods irregularities without waiting for the next of inactivity. service. In the event of a long period of Periodic Checks inactivity. Every month or every 600 miles ( The following checks must be carried out 1,000 km) or before long trips check and, more often than indicated in the if necessary, top off: Scheduled Servicing Plan: Engine coolant level. 208 Maintenance Plan (2.9L V6 Engine) 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● date. Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary. Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact. 209 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators. Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2) Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●● accessory drive belt(s). Change engine coolant ●

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine oil and replace oil filter. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ● Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3) Replace air cleaner cartridge (4) ●●●●●●● Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid. (5)

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. After each discs replacement, reset the warning light using the diagnostic socket. (3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). (5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 210 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Replace the cabin air filter (6) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement.* ●●●●●

(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). * The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

211 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.9L V6 Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

0904144061US

1 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 4 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 5 – Engine Oil Dipstick 3 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 6 – Engine Oil Filler

212 Engine Oil The engine oil level can be seen on the Caution! Warning! instrument cluster display every time the engine is started, or on the Information and Entertainment system display by The oil level is not refreshed immediately on If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU the display after topping off. Consequently, the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with sequence: display and follow the procedure below. aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns! 1. “Apps” Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is 2. “My Car” Caution! removed to add oil to engine. Never run 3. “Oil Level” the engine with cap removed this could Check on the display using the 6 notches cause oil to leak from engine. The oil level must never exceed the MAX that the oil level is between the MIN and Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update mark. MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches On Display MAX level. If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, If the oil level is close to or below the MIN to ensure the correct indication of the oil go to an authorized dealer as soon as mark, add oil gradually through the filler, level on the display, leave the vehicle on possible to have the oil in excess removed. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication flat ground with the engine running for Update On Display” in this section) Do not add oil with specifications approximately five minutes (temperature different from those of the oil already in the considering that each notch shown on the higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the engine. display corresponds to approximately engine off. Then, start the engine again, 8.8floz(250ml). Used engine oil and oil filters contain and idle it for about five minutes. substances which are harmful to the Note: If you have added the specified environment. To change the oil and filters, Caution! amount of oil and the indicator is not we advise you to contact an authorized reading “Full”, please contact an dealer. authorized dealer. Make sure not to add too much oil when topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess Engine Coolant Fluid may damage the engine. Have the vehicle If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of checked. Never exceed the MAX level when the reservoir and add the fluid described topping off engine oil. in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

213 Washer Fluid For Windshield/ Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, Battery Headlights hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on The battery does not require the If the level is too low, remove reservoir for a long time when the engine is not electrolyte to be topped up with distilled cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid running. water. A periodic check carried out at an described in "Technical Specifications". Before performing any operation on authorized dealer, however, is necessary Note: The headlight washing system will the electrical system, disconnect the to check efficiency. not work if the liquid level is low negative battery cable. Follow the battery manufacturer's (situation indicated by the symbol on the instructions for maintenance. If you wish to install electrical instrument cluster display). The accessories after purchasing the vehicle Replacing The Battery windshield washer will keep working. that require permanent electrical supply If necessary, replace the battery with On vehicles equipped with headlight (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which another original battery with the same washers, if equipped, there is a reference influence the electrical supply specifications. Follow the battery notch on the dipstick: ONLYthe requirements, contact your authorized manufacturer’s instructions for windshield/rear window washer operates dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate maintenance. with the level below this reference. the overall electrical consumption. Brake Fluid Check that the fluid is at the maximum Caution! Warning! level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE contact your authorized dealer to have the system checked. If the charge level remains under 50% for a Battery acid is a corrosive solution and long time, the battery may be damaged by can burn or even blind you. Do not allow Automatic Transmission Activation sulphation, reducing its capacity and battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or System Oil efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or The transmission control oil level should also more prone to the risk of freezing (at temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). on skin, flush the area immediately with only be checked at your authorized large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump dealer. Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for Note: After the battery is disconnected, further information. Useful Advice For Extending The Life the steering must be initialized. The Of YourBattery Battery gas is flammable and explosive. warning light on the instrument panel Keep flame or sparks away from the To avoid draining your battery and make switches on to indicate this. To carry out battery. Do not use a booster battery or any it last longer, observe the following this procedure, simply turn the steering other booster source with an output greater instructions: wheel all the way from one end to the than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to other, and then turn it back to the central touch each other. When you park the vehicle, ensure that position. the doors and liftgate are closed properly Battery posts, terminals, and related to prevent any lights from remaining on accessories contain lead and lead inside the passenger's compartment. compounds. Wash hands after handling. 214 Note: It will not be possible to open the BATTERY RECHARGING To reach the battery, remove the load liftgate with a key or by pressing the floor inside the liftgate. button in the passenger compartment Important Notes when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual liftgate Warning! opening strap on the liftgate lock before disconnecting the battery. The procedure is described in the “Liftgate Emergency Never charge or recharge a frozen Opening” procedure described in the battery: it may explode because of the “Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. Know YourVehicle”. At all times while charging or recharging the battery, make sure that any sparks or open flames are kept sufficiently far away from the battery. 0604132234US Load Floor Note: Locate the battery access panel under Before using the charging device, the load floor. always make sure that it is appropriate for the installed battery, with constant voltage (below 14.8 V) and low amperage (maximum 15 A). Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment. Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions provided with the device in order to properly and safely connect it to the 0604132235US vehicle battery. Battery Access Panel Remove the protective cover and Youcan recharge the battery without connect the positive cable terminal of the disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's charger (usually red) to the positive electrical system. terminal (+) of the battery.

215 Connect the negative terminal of the 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of DEALER SERVICE charger (usually black) to nut next to the the battery charger and then the red The following pages contain instructions negative terminal (-) of the battery. cable terminal. on the required maintenance from the 4. Refit the protective cover of the technical personnel who designed the positive terminal of the battery and the vehicle. access cover to the battery In addition to these specific maintenance compartment. instructions specified for routine scheduled servicing, there are other Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is components which may require periodic used with the battery fitted on the maintenance or replacement over the vehicle, before connecting it disconnect vehicle’s life cycle. both cables of the battery itself. Do not use a "quick-type" battery charger to Engine Oil provide the starting voltage. Engine Oil Level Check 09036V0002EM Battery To ensure correct engine lubrication, the oil must always be kept at the prescribed 1 — Protective Cover level (see "Engine Compartment" in this 2 — Negative Post (Nut) chapter).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check the oil level at regular intervals, for The vehicle is equipped with an example every 1,864 miles (3,000 km). Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS), which is It must be checked about five minutes able to measure the charge and discharge after stopping the engine. voltage and calculate the charge level Full operating temperature must be and the general condition of the battery. reached. The vehicle must also be parked The sensor is placed next to the negative on as level a surface as possible. terminal (-) of the battery. The engine oil level can be checked using For a correct charge/discharge the Information and Entertainment procedure, the charge voltage must go system. To access the function, activate through the IBS sensor. the main menu (MENU button) and select 1. Turn the charger on and follow the the following options in sequence: instructions on the user's manual to 1. “Applications” completely recharge the battery. 2. “My Car” 2. When the battery is charged, turn the charger off before disconnecting it from 3. “Oil level” the battery. 216 Ensure that the oil level is within the Engine Oil Filter interval on the dipstick between the Replacing the Engine Oil Filter Warning! minimum and maximum limits (Quadrifoglio only). The engine oil filter must be replaced each time the engine oil is changed. It is Changing The Engine Oil Use only refrigerants and compressor advised to replace it with a genuine spare lubricants approved by the manufacturer for See the "Maintenance Plan" for the part, specifically designed for this your air conditioning system. Some correct servicing intervals. vehicle. unapproved refrigerants are flammable and Choice Of Engine Oil Type Air Filter can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the To ensure optimal performance and Replacing the Air Cleaner system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer maximum protection in all operating See the "Maintenance Plan" for the to Warranty Information Book, located in conditions, it is advised to use certified your owner’s information kit, for further correct servicing intervals. It is advised to engine oils. Refer to "Fluid And warranty information. replace it with a genuine spare part, Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" specifically designed for this vehicle. for further information. Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Air Conditioning System Maintenance Additives For Engine Oil Bodywork It is strongly recommended not to use To ensure the best possible performance, Ensure that the locks and bodywork additives (other than leak detection dyes) the air conditioning system must be junction points, including components with the engine oil. checked and undergo maintenance at an such as the seat guides, door hinges (and The engine oil is a product designed authorized dealer at the beginning of the rollers), liftgate and hood are periodically specially for the vehicle and its summer. lubricated with lithium-based grease to performance may be deteriorated ensure correct, silent operation and to through the use of further additives. Caution! protect them from rust and wear. Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters Thoroughly clean the components, eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. For the disposal of the engine oil and Do not use chemicals to clean the air After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and filters, contact the appropriate body to conditioning system, since the internal grease. Also pay particular attention to determine local regulations. components may be damaged. This kind of damage is not covered by warranty. the hood closing devices, to ensure Note: Used engine oil disposed of correct operation. During operations on incorrectly may seriously harm the the hood, to be carried out with the environment. Replace The Cabin Air Filter engine cold, also remember to check, See the "Maintenance Plan" for the clean and lubricate the locking, release correct servicing intervals. For cleaner and safety devices. replacement, contact an authorized dealer. 217 Lubricate the external lock barrels twice This function can only be activated within a year. Apply a small amount of two minutes of cycling the ignition to Warning! high-quality lubricant directly into the STOP. lock barrel. To activate this function, move the lever If necessary, contact your authorized Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is upward for at least three seconds. dealer as soon as possible. a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather conditions. Windshield Wiper Periodically clean the windshield and rear Note: The life of the windshield wiper window and rubber profile of the blades varies according to the usage windshield wiper blades, using a sponge frequency. In any case, it is advised to or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive replace the blades approximately once a detergent. This eliminates the salt or year. When the blades are worn, noise, impurities accumulated when driving. marks on the glass or streaks of water Prolonged operation of the windshield may be noticed. In the presence of these window wipers with dry glass may cause conditions, clean the windshield wiper the deterioration of the blades, in blades or, if necessary, replace them. 0903142761US Windshield Wiper Stalk addition to abrasion of the surface of the Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades glass. To eliminate the impurities on the Function Deactivation SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ("Service Position" Function) dry glass, always operate the windshield The function is deactivated if: washers. The "service position" function allows the driver to replace the windshield wiper In the event of very low outdoor More than two minutes passes before blades more easily. It is also temperatures, below 0 °F (-17.8 °C) , cycling the ignition to the STOP position recommended to activate this function ensure that the movement of the rubber after having raised the lever and putting when it is snowing and to make it easier part in contact with the glass is not the wipers into service position. to remove any dirt deposits in the area obstructed. Use a suitable deicing where the blades are normally The ignition is cycled to the ON and the product to release it if required. positioned, when washing. windshield wiper control is used. Avoid using the windshield wipers to Note: If the windshield wipers are raised If, after using the function, the ignition is remove frost or ice. while not in the “service position,” it is set back to ON with the blades in a Also avoid contact of the rubber profile possible to damage the hood. position other than rest position (at the of the blades with petroleum derivatives base of the windshield), they will only such as engine oil, gas, etc. Activation Of The Function return to rest position following a To activate this function, disable the command given using the stalk (stalk windshield wiper before cycling the upwards, into unstable position) or when ignition to STOP. a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. 218 Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades If an unusual noise from the exhaust or Proceed as follows: the presence of smoke in the passenger compartment is identified, or if the 1. Raise the wiper arm, push tab of the underbody or rear section of the vehicle attachment spring and remove the blade have been damaged, have the entire from the arm. exhaust system and adjoining bodywork areas checked at your authorized dealer to identify any components which are broken, damaged, worn or have moved from their correct fitting position. Open welding or loose connections may 09046V0003EM Front Windshield Washers permit exhaust gas to enter the passenger compartment. Have the exhaust system checked every time the vehicle is raised. Replace the components where necessary (for these

0604132236US operations, contact an authorized Wiper Release Tab dealer). In normal operating conditions, the 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in catalytic converter does not require the dedicated housing in the arm and maintenance. To ensure that it operates checking that it is locked. correctly, however, and prevent it from 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the getting damaged, it is extremely windshield. important that the engine operates perfectly. Note: Do not operate the windshield 09046V0004EM wiper with the blades lifted from the Rear Windshield Washer To minimize the risk of damaging the catalytic converter, proceed as follows: windshield. Then, check that the nozzle holes are not Front/Rear Windshield Washers clogged; use a needle to unblock them if Do not stop the engine or deactivate necessary. The window washer nozzles are fixed. If the ignition with gear engaged and vehicle in motion. there is no jet of fluid, first check that Exhaust System there is fluid in the reservoir. Refer to Do not attempt to start the engine by Adequate maintenance of the engine “Engine Compartment” in this chapter for bump starting. exhaust system represents the best the reservoir location. protection against leaks of carbon Do not persist in using the vehicle if monoxide into the passenger idling is very irregular or the operating compartment. conditions are very notably irregular. 219 When working near the radiator cooling With the engine off and at normal operating temperature, check that the Warning! fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is cooling system radiator cap is closed temperature controlled and can start at any properly. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They time the ignition is in the ON mode. contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can Coolant Check Warning! make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and they both need to be checked to ensure Do not open hot engine cooling system. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when you park over materials that can burn. Such the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or materials might be grass or leaves coming “Engine Compartment” section for the remove the cap to cool an overheated into contact with your exhaust system. Do locations. engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in not park or operate your vehicle in areas Check the engine coolant and intercooler the cooling system. To prevent scalding or where your exhaust system can contact coolant level every oil change or before injury, do not remove the pressure cap while anything that can burn. long trips. the system is hot or under pressure. If there are impurities in the engine Do not use a pressure cap other than the Cooling System coolant, the system must be drained, one specified for your vehicle. Personal flushed and refilled: contact an injury or engine damage may result. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE authorized dealer. Warning! Check the front part of the condenser to Note: Before removing the coolant check for any build-up of insects, leaves reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it down. Youor others can be badly burned by hot by spraying delicately with water. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam Check the hoses of the engine/ Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The coming from under the hood, do not open the intercooler cooling system to ensure that Engine/Intercooler Coolant hood until the radiator has had time to cool. the rubber has not deteriorated and that If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, Never open a cooling system pressure cap there are no cracks, tears, cuts or have cleaning and flushing carried out at when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. obstructions in the expansion tank side an authorized dealer. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry and radiator side connectors. Should See the "Maintenance Plan" for the away from the radiator cooling fan when the there be any doubt regarding leaks from correct servicing intervals. hood is raised. The fan starts automatically the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are and may start at any time, whether the required), have the seal checked at an engine is running or not. authorized dealer.

220 Note: Disposal of Used Coolant foot on the brake pedal and don’t put unnecessary strain on it to prevent the For topping up, refer to "Fluids And Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is brakes from overheating. Excess pad Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" subject to legal requirements. Contact wear may cause damage to the braking for proper coolant specifications. the appropriate body to determine local regulations. system. Do not use pure water, alcohol-based When an insufficient oil level is coolants, corrosions inhibitors or Note: detected, contact an authorized dealer additional anti-rust products because To prevent the fluid from being to have the system checked. they may be incompatible with the ingested by children or animals, do not engine coolant and cause the clogging of keep it in open containers or pour it on Always keep the cap of the brake the radiator. The use of propylene the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor fluid reservoir (in the engine glycol-based coolant is also not immediately. Eliminate any traces of compartment) completely closed. recommended. fluid from the ground immediately. Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap When the vehicle stops after a short Warning! To prevent loss of engine coolant, make trip, steam may be seen coming out from sure that the expansion tank cap is front of the hood. This is a normal closed. If it is open, screw it completely phenomenon which is due to the Use only manufacturer's recommended until you reach/hear the click. presence of rain, snow or a lot of brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” Periodically check the cap and clean it moisture on the surface of the radiator. in “Technical Specifications” for further from any foreign bodies that may have information. Using the wrong type of brake With engine and system cold, do not fluid can severely damage your brake deposited on the external surface. top up with coolant beyond the system and/or impair its performance. The maximum level indicated on the proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is reservoir in the engine compartment. also identified on the original factory Warning! installed hydraulic master cylinder Braking System reservoir. To avoid contamination from foreign Never add coolant with the engine hot or In order to guarantee the efficiency of matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid overheated. the braking system, periodically check its components; for this operation, contact or fluid that has been in a tightly closed Do not attempt to cool an overheated an authorized dealer. container. Keep the master cylinder engine by loosening or removing the cap. reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake The heat causes a considerable increase in See the "Maintenance Plan" for the fluid in a open container absorbs moisture pressure in the cooling system. correct servicing intervals. from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly To prevent damage to the engine, only use Note: Driving with your foot resting on during hard or prolonged braking, resulting the engine cooling circuit caps provided. the brake pedal may compromise its in sudden brake failure. This could result in a efficiency, increasing the risk of collision. accidents. When driving, never keep your 221 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Frequency of Oil Changes RAISING THE VEHICLE result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine In normal vehicle operating conditions, it If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. is not necessary to change the authorized dealer which is equipped with Brake fluid can also damage painted and transmission oil. shop jacks or jack arms. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. The vehicle lifting points are marked on Caution! the side skirts with the symbols. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an partial or complete brake failure. This could authorized dealer immediately. Severe result in a collision. transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to Automatic Transmission adjust the fluid level accurately. Use only a transmission oil with the characteristics indicated in "Fluids and Replacing The Battery Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications". If necessary, replace the battery with another battery with the same Special Additives 0434132124US specifications. It is advised to contact an Do not use any type of additive with the Vehicle Lift Point Locations SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE authorized dealer for replacement. automatic transmission oil. The automatic transmission oil is a product Follow the battery manufacturer's designed specially for this vehicle and its instructions for maintenance. performance may be compromised through the use of further additives.

Caution!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

222 TIRES Note: Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is Tire Safety Information Temporary high pressure compact spare based on U.S. design standards. tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded Tire safety information will cover aspects P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size of the following information: Tire into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, designation. Example: P215/ 80D18 103M. Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire 65R15 95H. Pressures, and Tire Loading. High flotation tire sizing is based on European — Metric tire sizing is U.S. design standards and it begins with Tire Markings based on European design standards. the tire diameter molded into the Tires designed to this standard have the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the 0601085395US letters “LT” that are molded into the Tire Markings sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Code (TIN) 2 — Size 5 — Maximum Designation Pressure 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, Description Traction and Temperature Grades

223 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

224 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

225 Tire Identification Number (TIN) sidewalls will have the full TIN, including is not found on the outboard side, then the date code, located on the white you will find it on the inboard side of the The TIN may be found on one or both sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN tire. sides of the tire; however, the date code on the outboard side of black sidewall may only be on one side. Tires with white tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

226 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for Cold Tire Inflation Pressure a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

227 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle Note: The proper cold tire inflation condition, gross axle weight ratings pressure is listed on the driver’s side (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's must not be exceeded. For further side door. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Check the inflation pressure of each tire, Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” including the spare tire (if equipped), at section of this manual. least monthly and inflate to the To determine the maximum loading recommended pressure for your vehicle. conditions of your vehicle, locate the GUID-054900418-high.tif statement “The combined weight of Tire And Loading Information Placard occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire This placard tells you important and Loading Information placard. The information about the: combined weight of occupants, 1. Number of people that can be carried cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight in the vehicle. (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Steps For Determining Correct Load SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 0806115150US 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Limit— 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the (1) Locate the statement “The front, rear, and spare tires. combined weight of occupants and Loading cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. The vehicle maximum load on the tire (2) Determine the combined weight must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You of the driver and passengers that will will not exceed the tire's load carrying be riding in your vehicle. capacity if you adhere to the loading (3) Subtract the combined weight of 0806115151US conditions, tire size, and cold tire Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) inflation pressures specified on the Tire the driver and passengers from XXX and Loading Information placard in kg or XXX lbs. “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

228 (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit available amount of cargo and For example, if “XXX” amount equals luggage load capacity. For example, 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity there will be five 150 lb passengers is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as in your vehicle, the amount of shown in step 4. available cargo and luggage load Note: capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred (5) Determine the combined weight to your vehicle. The following table of luggage and cargo being loaded on shows examples on how to calculate the vehicle. That weight may not total load, cargo/luggage, and towing safely exceed the available cargo and capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and luggage load capacity calculated in size of occupants. This table is for Step 4. illustration purposes only and may not (6) If your vehicle will be towing a be accurate for the seating and load trailer, load from your trailer will be carry capacity of your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult For the following example, the this manual to determine how this combined weight of occupants and reduces the available cargo and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

229 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

230 Tires — General Information Always drive with each tire inflated to the At least once a month: Tire Pressure recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Both under-inflation and over-inflation Do not make a visual judgement when to the safe and satisfactory operation of affect the stability of the vehicle and can determining proper inflation. Tires may your vehicle. Four primary areas are produce a feeling of sluggish response or look properly inflated even when they are affected by improper tire pressure: over responsiveness in the steering. under-inflated. Safety and Vehicle Stability Note: Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Economy visible damage. Unequal tire pressures from side to Tread Wear side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Caution! Ride Comfort Safety Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or After inspecting or adjusting the tire right. pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Warning! Fuel Economy entering the valve stem, which could Underinflated tires will increase tire damage the valve stem. rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel Improperly inflated tires are dangerous consumption. and can cause collisions. Inflation pressures specified on the Tread Wear Underinflation increases tire flexing and placard are always “cold tire inflation can result in overheating and tire failure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is cause abnormal wear patterns and defined as the tire pressure after the Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to reduced tread life, resulting in the need vehicle has not been driven for at least cushion shock. Objects on the road and for earlier tire replacement. three hours, or driven less than 1 mile chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of Proper tire inflation contributes to a three hours. The cold tire inflation Overinflated or underinflated tires can comfortable ride. Over-inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum affect vehicle handling and can fail inflation pressure molded into the tire suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. sidewall. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Check tire pressures more often if problems. Youcould lose control of your Tire Inflation Pressures subject to a wide range of outdoor vehicle. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is temperatures, as tire pressures vary with Unequal tire pressures from one side of listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear temperature changes. the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. edge of the driver's side door. 231 Tire pressures change by approximately vehicle loading may be required for When driving at speeds 100 mph 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to (160 km/h) and above, increased tire temperature change. Keep this in mind your authorized tire dealer or original pressures and reduced vehicle loading when checking tire pressure inside a equipment vehicle dealer for are required for high-speed vehicle garage, especially in the Winter. recommended safe operating speeds, operation. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F loading and cold tire inflation pressures. For driving speeds above 100 mph (20°C) and the outside temperature = (160 km/h) recommended cold tire 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation inflation pressures are listed below pressure should be increased by 3 psi Warning! under "High Speed Tire Inflation (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must every 12°F (7°C) for this outside not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + temperature condition. High speed driving with your vehicle under three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) maximum load is dangerous. The added Tire pressure may increase from 2 to strain on your tires could cause them to fail. luggage). 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Youcould have a serious collision. Do not NOT reduce this normal pressure build up drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum or your tire pressure will be too low. capacity at continuous speeds above Warning! 75 mph (120 km/h). Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation High speed driving with your vehicle under SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Recommended Cold Tire Inflation maximum load is dangerous. The added The manufacturer advocates driving at Pressures strain on your tires could cause them to fail. safe speeds and within posted speed For vehicle speeds below 100 mph Youcould have a serious collision. limits. Where speed limits or conditions (160 km/h), recommended cold tire are such that the vehicle can be driven at inflation pressures are listed on the Tire high speeds, maintaining correct tire And Loading Information Placard located inflation pressure is very important. on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge Increased tire pressure and reduced of the driver's side door.

232 Recommended Cold High Speed Tire Tire Inflation Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear 33 psi/ 39 psi/ 255/45R20 101Y 20x9J – – 227kpa 269kpa Original Equipment 36 psi/ 42 psi/ 285/40R20 104Y 20x10J – – 248kpa 290kpa 33 psi/ 39 psi/ 255/45R20 M+S 20x9J – – 227kpa 269kpa Snow Tires 36 psi/ 42 psi/ 285/40R20 M+S 20x10J – – 248kpa 290kpa

Radial Ply Tires The damage is only on the tread Run Flat Tires — If Equipped section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph Warning! The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation an inch (6 mm). pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is Combining radial ply tires with other types Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run of tires on your vehicle will cause your repairs and additional information. Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires that have experienced a loss of pressure Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat in sets of four. Never combine them with mode it has limited driving capabilities other types of tires. should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and and needs to be replaced immediately. A service description (Load Index and Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run Tire Repair Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure flat tire is changed after driving with If your tire becomes damaged, it may be sensor as well as it is not designed to be underinflated tire condition, please repaired if it meets the following criteria: reused. replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under The tire has not been driven on when run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition. flat.

233 Note: TPM Sensor must be replaced Distance driven. after driving the vehicle on a flat tire Performance tires, tires with a speed condition. rating of V or higher, and Summer tires It is not recommended driving a vehicle typically have a reduced tread life. loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer Rotation of these tires per the vehicle while a tire is in the run flat mode. scheduled maintenance is highly See the tire pressure monitoring section recommended. for more information.

Tire Spinning 0806104865NA Warning! Tire Tread When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's 1 — Worn Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for 2 — New Tire after six years, regardless of the remaining longer than 30 seconds continuously tread. Failure to follow this warning can without stopping. result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose These indicators are molded into the control and have a collision resulting in bottom of the tread grooves. They will serious injury or death. appear as bands when the tread depth Warning! becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When the tread is worn to the tread wear Note: Wheel Valve Stem must be indicators, the tire should be replaced. replaced as well when installing new tires Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces due to wear and tear in existing tires. generated by excessive wheel speeds may Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this cause tire damage or failure. A tire could section for further information. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place explode and injure someone. Do not spin with as little exposure to light as your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph Life Of Tire possible. Protect tires from contact with (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds oil, grease, and gasoline. continuously when you are stuck, and do not The service life of a tire is dependent let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter upon varying factors including, but not what the speed. limited to: Driving style. Tread Wear Indicators Tire pressure - Improper cold tire Tread wear indicators are in the original inflation pressures can cause uneven equipment tires to help you in wear patterns to develop across the tire determining when your tires should be tread. These abnormal wear patterns will replaced. reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. 234 Replacement Tires Spare Tires — If Equipped The tires on your new vehicle provide a Warning! Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire balance of many characteristics. They Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please should be inspected regularly for wear refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of and correct cold tire inflation pressures. Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, Emergency” for further information. The manufacturer strongly recommends or speed rating other than that specified for that you use tires equivalent to the your vehicle. Some combinations of Caution! originals in size, quality and performance unapproved tires and wheels may change when replacement is needed. Refer to the suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in steering, handling, and braking of your Because of the reduced ground clearance, this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading vehicle. This can cause unpredictable do not take your vehicle through an Information placard or the Vehicle handling and stress to steering and automatic car wash with a compact or Certification Label for the size suspension components. Youcould lose limited use temporary spare installed. designation of your tire. The Load Index control and have a collision resulting in Damage to the vehicle may result. and Speed Symbol for your tire will be serious injury or death. Use only the tire and found on the original equipment tire wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Spare Tire Matching Original sidewall. Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Never use a tire with a smaller load index See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in Equipped the “Tire Safety Information” section of this or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a manual for more information relating to the Yourvehicle may be equipped with a Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. Youcould lose spare tire and wheel equivalent in look It is recommended to replace the two control and have a collision. and function to the original equipment front tires or two rear tires as a pair. tire and wheel found on the front or rear Replacing just one tire can seriously Failure to equip your vehicle with tires axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may having adequate speed capability can result affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle be used in the tire rotation for your replace a wheel, make sure that the control. vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, wheel’s specifications match those of the refer to an authorized tire dealer for the original wheels. recommended tire rotation pattern. It is recommended you contact an Caution! authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or Replacing original tires with tires of a capability. Failure to use equivalent different size may result in false replacement tires may adversely affect speedometer and odometer readings. the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 235 Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of Warning! The compact spare is for temporary this limited use spare tire affects vehicle emergency use only. Youcan identify if handling. Since it is not the same as your your vehicle is equipped with a compact Compact and collapsible spares are for original equipment tire, replace (or spare by looking at the spare tire temporary emergency use only. With these repair) the original equipment tire and description on the Tire and Loading spares, do not drive more than 50 mph reinstall on the vehicle at the first Information Placard located on the (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have opportunity. driver’s side door opening or on the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to descriptions begin with the letter “T” or Warning! “S” preceding the size designation. follow the warnings, which apply to your Example: T145/80D18 103M. spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Limited use spares are for emergency use Since this tire has limited tread life, the only. Installation of this limited use spare Full Size Spare — If Equipped tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, original equipment tire should be do not drive more than the speed listed on repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on The full size spare is for temporary the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to your vehicle at the first opportunity. emergency use only. This tire may look the cold tire inflation pressures listed on Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to like the originally equipped tire on the your Tire and Loading Information Placard SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE mount a conventional tire on the compact front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace spare wheel, since the wheel is designed not. This spare tire may have limited specifically for the compact spare tire. (or repair) the original equipment tire at the tread life. When the tread is worn to the first opportunity and reinstall it on your Do not install more than one compact tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any full size spare tire needs to be replaced. vehicle control. given time. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on Wheel And Wheel Trim Care the vehicle at the first opportunity. All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, Limited Use Spare — If Equipped should be cleaned regularly using mild The limited use spare tire is for (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain temporary emergency use only. This tire their luster and to prevent corrosion. is identified by a label located on the Wash wheels with the same soap solution limited use spare wheel. This label recommended for the body of the vehicle contains the driving limitations for this and remember to always wash when the spare. This tire may look like the original surfaces are not hot to the touch. 236 Yourwheels are susceptible to Tire Types deterioration caused by salt, sodium Caution! chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium All Season Tires — If Equipped chloride, etc., and other road chemicals All Season tires provide traction for all used to melt ice or control dust on dirt Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Winter). Traction levels may vary soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use These products may damage the wheel's between different all season tires. All harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can protective finish. Such damage is not season tires can be identified by the M+S, covered by the New Vehicle Limited damage the wheel’s protective coating M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire that helps keep them from corroding and Warranty. Only car wash soap is recommended. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets tarnishing. of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your Caution! Note: If you intend parking or storing vehicle. your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Avoid products or automatic car washes drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Equipped that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline remove the water droplets from the additives or harsh brushes. Many brake components. This activity will Summer tires provide traction in both aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic remove the red rust on the brake rotors wet and dry conditions, and are not car washes may damage the wheel's and prevent vehicle vibration when intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If protective finish. Such damage is not braking. your vehicle is equipped with Summer covered by the New Vehicle Limited Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels tires, be aware these tires are not Warranty. Only car wash soap is designed for Winter or cold driving recommended. conditions. Install Winter tires on your Caution! vehicle when ambient temperatures are When cleaning extremely dirty wheels less than 45°F (7°C) or if roads are including excessive brake dust, care must covered with ice or snow. For more be taken in the selection of tire and wheel If your vehicle is equipped with these information, contact an authorized specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. dealer. prevent damage to the wheels. Select a They will permanently damage this finish Summer tires do not contain the all non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for and such damage is not covered by the New season designation or mountain/ aluminum or chrome wheels. Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH Use Summer tires only in sets of four; A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this failure to do so may adversely affect the is all that is required to maintain this finish. safety and handling of your vehicle.

237 While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction Warning! Caution! capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice Some states prohibit studded tires; To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, therefore, local laws should be checked observe the following precautions: resulting in severe injury or death. Driving before using these tire types. Because of restricted traction device too fast for conditions also creates the clearance between tires and other possibility of loss of vehicle control. Tire Chains (Traction Devices) suspension components, it is important that Use of traction devices require sufficient only traction devices in good condition are tire-to-body clearance. Follow these used. Broken devices can cause serious Snow Tires recommendations to guard against damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if damage. noise occurs that could indicate device Some areas of the country require the breakage. Remove the damaged parts of use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow Note: the device before further use. tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire Traction device must be of proper Install device as tightly as possible and sidewall. size for the tire, as recommended by the then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). If you need snow tires, traction device manufacturer select tires equivalent Use on Rear Tires Only Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE in size and type to the Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns original equipment Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are and large bumps, especially with a loaded tires. Use snow tires vehicle. only in sets of four; recommended: Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry failure to do so may For a 285/40R20 tire, use of a pavement. adversely affect the safety and handling zero-clearance snow traction device of your vehicle. recommended. Observe the traction device Snow tires generally have lower speed manufacturer’s instructions on the method ratings than what was originally equipped of installation, operating speed, and with your vehicle and should not be conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device operated at sustained speeds over manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above (48 km/h). 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer Do not use traction devices on a compact for recommended safe operating speeds, spare tire. loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

238 Tire Rotation Recommendations DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road Tire Rotations - Do Not Rotate Tires TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. TIRE QUALITY GRADES Due to different size tires and wheels on Traction Grades front and rear axles tire rotation is not The following tire grading categories The Traction grades, from highest to possible. were established by the National lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Highway Traffic Safety grades represent the tire's ability to Caution! Administration. The specific grade stop on wet pavement, as measured rating assigned by the tire's under controlled conditions on Damage to the vehicle may occur if front manufacturer in each category is specified government test surfaces and rear tires are rotated shown on the sidewall of the tires on of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. marked C may have poor traction In the case of irregular wear of the tires All passenger vehicle tires must identify the cause and correct it as soon performance. as possible, by contacting an authorized conform to Federal safety dealer. requirements in addition to these grades. Warning! Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire Temperature Grades graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon highest), B, and C, representing the the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled variations in driving habits, service conditions on a specified indoor 239 laboratory test wheel. Sustained high STORING THE VEHICLE have accumulated on it. Do not use temperature can cause the material If the vehicle is left inactive for longer compact plastic sheets, as they do not of the tire to degenerate and reduce than a month, the following precautions allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the vehicle. tire life, and excessive temperature should be observed: can lead to sudden tire failure. The Park the vehicle in an area that is Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) covered and dry, and well-ventilated if above the standard prescribed pressure grade C corresponds to a level of and check it periodically. performance, which all passenger possible. Slightly open the windows. vehicle tires must meet under the Check that the electric park brake is Do not drain the engine cooling system. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety not activated. Standard No. 109. Grades B and A Carry out the “Liftgate Emergency Any time the vehicle is left inactive for Opening” procedure described in the two weeks or more, operate the air represent higher levels of conditioning system with engine idling performance on the laboratory test “Power Liftgate” section of “Getting To Know YourVehicle”. for at least five minutes, setting external wheel, than the minimum required by air and with fan set to maximum speed. law. Disconnect the negative battery This operation will ensure appropriate terminal and check the battery charge. lubrication for the system, thus Repeat this check once every three minimizing the possibility of damage to Warning! months during storage. the compressor when the system is SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE If the battery is not disconnected from operated again. The temperature grade for this tire the electrical system, check its state of Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP charge every thirty days. is established for a tire that is and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before properly inflated and not Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax. disconnecting the electrical supply from overloaded. Excessive speed, the battery. When reconnecting the under-inflation, or excessive Clean and protect the shiny metal electrical supply to the battery, make loading, either separately or in parts using special compounds available sure that the ignition is in the STOP commercially. combination, can cause heat position and the driver’s side door is closed. buildup and possible tire failure. Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift them off the glass. Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated plastic sheet, paying particular care not to damage the painted surface by dragging any dust that may 240 BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently Paint Protection Against Atmospheric rinsing the sponge. Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formation of Rinse well with water and dry with a The vehicle is equipped with the best leather chamois. available technological solutions to rust. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door These include: washing the vehicle: the frequency frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with depends on the conditions and special care, as water may stagnate more Painting products and systems which environment where the vehicle is used. easily in these areas. Do not wash the give the vehicle resistance to corrosion For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle after it has been left in the sun or and abrasion. vehicle more often in areas with high with the hood hot: this may alter the shine Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) levels of atmospheric pollution or salted of the paintwork. steel sheets, with high resistance to roads. Note: Avoid parking under trees; the corrosion. Some parts of the vehicle may be resin dropped by trees makes the covered with a matte paint which, in paintwork go opaque and increases the Spraying of plastic parts, with a order to be maintained intact, requires possibility of corrosion. protective function in the more exposed special care. Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. To correctly wash the vehicle, follow the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Use of “open” boxed sections to these instructions: If washing the vehicle in a service that prevent condensation and pockets of If high pressure jets or cleaners are moves the vehicle, for vehicles with moisture which could favor the formation used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance automatic transmissions, proceed with of rust inside. of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the the following directions: Use of special films to protect against bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. Ensure that the vehicle is on a flat abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, Build up of water could cause damage to surface doors, etc.). the vehicle in the long term. Disable the automatic engagement of Corrosion Warranty To make it easier to remove any dirt the parking brake (refer to the “Electric deposits in the area where the blades are Park Brake” in “Starting And Operating” Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion normally located it is recommended to for further information). Warranty against perforation due to rust position the windshield wipers vertically of any original element of the structure (service position), for more information, With the vehicle stationary, the gear in or bodywork. For the general terms of refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. NEUTRAL (N) and the brake pedal this warranty, refer to the Warranty depressed, push the START button. Booklet. Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water if possible.

241 Note: The vehicle will remain in Engine Compartment INTERIORS NEUTRAL (N) for 15 minutes before At the end of every winter, wash the Periodically check the cleanliness of the PARK (P) will be engaged automatically. engine compartment thoroughly, taking interior, beneath the mats, which could Windows care not to aim the jet of water directly at cause oxidation of the sheet metal. the electronic control units or at the Use specific detergents and clean cloths windshield wiper motors. Have this Seats And Fabric Parts to prevent scratching or altering the operation performed at a specialized transparency. Remove dust with a soft brush or a workshop. vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a Note: The washing should take place moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the Caution! with the engine cold and the ignition seats with a sponge moistened with a device in the STOP position. After the solution of water and neutral detergent. washing operation, make sure that the Wipe the rear window inside gently with a Leather Seats cloth following the direction of the filaments various protections (e.g. rubber caps and to avoid damaging the heating device. guards) have not been removed or Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or damaged. slightly damp cloth, without exerting too much pressure. Front Headlights Remove any liquid or grease stains using Use a soft cloth soaked in water and an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. detergent for washing vehicles. Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Note: cloth dampened with water and mild soap. If the stain persists, use specific Never use aromatic substances (e.g. products and observe the instructions gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for carefully. cleaning the plastic lenses of the Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that headlights. the cleaning products used contain no When cleaning with a pressure alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in washer, keep the pressure washer at small quantities. least eight inches (20 cm) away from the Plastic And Coated Parts headlights. Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if possible made from microfiber), and a solution of water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent. To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products free from solvents and

242 designed to maintain the original Carbon Fiber Parts appearance and color of the components. To eliminate small scratches and marks Remove any dust using a microfiber on the carbon, contact your authorized cloth, if necessary moistened with water. dealer. An improperly performed The use of paper tissues is not operation may irreparably damage the recommended as these may leave carbon. residues. Genuine Leather Parts Use only water and mild soap to clean these parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Before using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances.

243 This page is intentionally left blank

244 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 246 those who just want to know every detail ENGINE ...... 247 of their vehicle, useful information on POWER SUPPLY ...... 248 understanding how your vehicle works is TRANSMISSION ...... 249 contained in this chapter and illustrated BRAKES ...... 250 with data, tables, and graphics. SUSPENSION ...... 251 STEERING ...... 252 DIMENSIONS...... 253 WEIGHTS ...... 255 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 256 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 258 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 259 PERFORMANCE ...... 261

245 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also stamped on the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) chassis near the front left shock Plate Vehicle Identification Number absorber and can be seen by opening the The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) engine compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard trim, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through the windshield. Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. 10016V0002EM Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA Vehicle Identification Number and Canada only). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10016V0001EM Vehicle Identification Number

246 ENGINE

2.9L V6 Engine Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 6/V Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82 Total displacement (cm³) 2891 Compression ratio 9.3:1 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505 Maximum power (kW) 375 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 443 Maximum torque (Nm) 600 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is Fuel 0–15%.

247 POWER SUPPLY

Power supply Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable 2.9L V6 Engine intake valve actuation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

248 TRANSMISSION

Version Transmission Traction 2.9L V6 Engine Eight Forward Gears Plus Reverse All-Wheel Drive

249 BRAKES

Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Disc Disc 2.9L V6 Engine Or Or Electric Carbon Ceramic Disc Carbon Ceramic Disc

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

250 SUSPENSION

Version Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension

251 STEERING

Version Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) steering TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

252 DIMENSIONS Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

10106V0002EM

AB C D EFGH I 56.1 inches 61.2 inches 63.3 inches 79.7 inches 31.3 inches 111 inches 40.3 inches 182.6 inches 73.7 inches (1424.9 (1554.5 (1607.8 (2024.4 (795 mm) (2818 mm) (1023.6 mm) (4638 mm) (1872 mm) mm) mm) mm) mm)

253 Luggage Compartment Volume Capacity (VDA standards) Rear seats not folded Vehicle unladen: 18.54 cubic feet (525 liters) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

254 WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.9L V6 engine Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without 4394 optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 992 Maximum permitted loads (**) 242 – Front axle 2579 – Rear axle 2976 – Total 5423 Maximum load on roof 165 lbs (75 kg) (*) If special equipment is fitted the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

255 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) Many areas of the country require the This engine is designed or gasoline containing methanol are not use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to meet all emission the responsibility of the manufacturer to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. regulations, and and may void or not be covered under Reformulated gasoline contains provide satisfactory New Vehicle Limited Warranty. fuel economy and oxygenates and are specifically blended performance when to reduce vehicle emissions and improve CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications air quality. using high-quality Modifications that allow the engine to unleaded “Regular” The use of reformulated gasoline is run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or gasoline having a posted octane number recommended. Properly blended Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ reformulated gasoline will provide to the engine, emissions, and fuel system 2 method. For optimal performance the improved performance and durability of components. Problems that result from use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” engine and fuel system components. running CNG or LP are not the gasoline is recommended in these Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends responsibility of the manufacturer and engines. may void or not be covered under the While operating on gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded New Vehicle Limited Warranty. required octane number, hearing a light gasoline with oxygenates such as TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS knocking sound from the engine is not a ethanol. MMT In Gasoline cause for concern. However, if the engine Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese is heard making a heavy knocking sound, Caution! Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- see your authorized dealer immediately. containing metallic additive that is Use of gasoline with a lower than blended into some gasoline to increase recommended octane number can cause DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing octane. Gasoline blended with MMT engine failure and may void or not be methanol, or gasoline containing more than provides no performance advantage covered by the New Vehicle Limited 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends beyond gasoline of the same octane Warranty. may result in starting and drivability number without MMT. Gasoline blended problems, damage critical fuel system Poor quality gasoline can cause problems components, cause emissions to exceed the with MMT reduces spark plug life and such as hard starting, stalling, and applicable standard, and/or cause the reduces emissions system performance hesitations. If you experience these Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. in some vehicles. The manufacturer symptoms, try another brand of gasoline Please observe pump labels as they should recommends that gasoline without MMT before considering service for the clearly communicate if a fuel contains be used in your vehicle. The MMT content vehicle. greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is 256 prohibited in Federal and California Fuel System Cautions Note: Intentional tampering with the reformulated gasoline. emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against Materials Added To Fuel Caution! you. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that Follow these guidelines to maintain your contain detergents, corrosion and vehicle’s performance: stability additives are recommended. The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited Using gasolines that have these additives by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can will help improve fuel economy, reduce impair engine performance and damage the emissions, and maintain vehicle emissions control system. performance. An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or Designated TOP TIER ignition malfunctions can cause the Detergent Gasoline catalytic converter to overheat. If you contains a higher level notice a pungent burning odor or some light of detergents to smoke, your engine may be out of tune or further aide in malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for minimizing engine and service assistance. fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER The use of fuel additives, which are now Detergent gasoline is recommended. being sold as octane enhancers, is not Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of recommended. Most of these products TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle Indiscriminate use of fuel system performance problems resulting from the cleaning agents should be avoided. Many use of such fuels or additives is not the of these materials intended for gum and responsibility of the manufacturer and may varnish removal may contain active void or not be covered under the New solvents or similar ingredients. These can Vehicle Limited Warranty. harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

257 FLUID CAPACITIES

2.9 V6 Engine

U.S. Metric Fuel tank 16.9 Gallons 64 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.5 Gallons 9.6 Liters Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.5 Gallons 5.75 Liters Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.1 Liters Main body: 0.8 Quarts Main body: 0.8 Liters TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV Left TV: 0.64 Quarts Left TV: 0.61 Liters Right TV: 0.72 Quarts Right TV: 0.68 Liters AWD System FAD transfer case 0.48 Quarts 0.45 Liters AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

258 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and durability. 2.9L V6 — Engine Lubrication

Features Specification Replacement interval 5W-40 FPT 9.55535-GH2 ACEA C3 According to the Maintenance Plan MS-12991 API SN

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

259 Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission Lubricants and greases SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 Synthetic Differential and reduction units FPW9.55550-DA8 lubricant RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes CUNA NC 956-16 Use rate 50% Not mixable with Engine coolant MS.90032 ASTMD3306 different formulation products. (*) To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems R1234yf or R134yf (depending on HVAC –– market)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

260 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h Model Maximum speed mph sec. 2.9L V6 Engine 177 * 3.6 * * Based on manufacturer testing.

261 This page is intentionally left blank

262 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .264 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 264 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....265 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .266 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .266

263 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Owner's telephone number (home and office) SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your Authorized dealer name satisfaction. We want you to be happy Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an be performed may not be covered by the authorized dealer. We strongly Alfa Romeo Customer Center warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to P.O.Box 21–8004 the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your log of your vehicle's service history, as vehicle the best, and are most concerned Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized (1-844-253-2872) dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada) CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O.Box 1621 correctly and in a timely manner. problems or the specific work you want Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 This is why you should always talk to an done. If you've had an accident or work Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) authorized dealer service manager first. done that is not on your maintenance log, Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. Customer Assistance For The Hearing Be Reasonable With Requests Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) If for some reason you are still not If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or To assist customers who have hearing have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They difficulties, the manufacturer has discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. installed special TDD advisor and list the items in order of (Telecommunication Devices for the If an authorized dealer is unable to priority. At many authorized dealers, you Deaf) equipment at its customer center. resolve the concern, you may contact the may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's customer center. daily charge. If you need a rental, it is customer, who has access to a TDD or a advisable to make these arrangements Any communication to the conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the when you call for an appointment. manufacturer's customer center should United States, can communicate with the include the following information: manufacturer by dialing Owner's name and address 1-800-380-2479.

264 Canadian residents with hearing Limited Warranty expires, please refer to WARRANTY INFORMATION difficulties that require assistance can the contract documents, and contact the use the special needs relay service person listed in those documents. See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and provisions of FCA US offered by Bell Canada. For TTY We appreciate that you have made a teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties major investment when you purchased applicable to this vehicle and market. Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also connect with a Bell Relay Service made a major investment in facilities, operator. tools, and training to assure that you are Service Contract absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. Youwill be pleased with their Youmay have purchased a service sincere efforts to resolve any warranty contract for a vehicle to help protect you issues or related concerns. from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Warning! manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines purchased a manufacturer's service only), some of its constituents, and certain contract, you will receive Plan Provisions vehicle components contain, or emit, and an Owner Identification Card in the chemicals known to the State of California mail within three weeks of the vehicle to cause cancer and birth defects, or other delivery date. If you have any questions reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids about the service contract, call the contained in vehicles and certain products of manufacturer's Service Contract component wear contain, or emit, chemicals National Customer Hotline at known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, reproductive harm. call (877) 230-0563 English / (877) 515-9112 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle 265 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS In The 50 United States And If you believe that your vehicle has a To order the following manuals, you may Washington, D.C. safety defect, you should contact the use either the website or the phone Customer Service Department numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, If you believe that your vehicle has a American Express, and Discover orders defect that could cause a crash or immediately. Canadian customers are accepted. cause injury or death, you should who wish to report a safety defect to Service Manuals immediately inform the National the Canadian government should These comprehensive Service Manuals Highway Traffic Safety contact Transport Canada, Motor provide the information that students Administration (NHTSA) in addition Vehicle Defect Investigations and and professional technicians need in to notifying FCA US LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ . solving, maintaining, servicing, and If NHTSA receives similar repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complaints, it may open an complete working knowledge of the CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a vehicle, system, and/or components is safety defect exists in a group of written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. vehicles, it may order a recall and Diagnostic Procedure Manuals remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled cannot become involved in individual with diagrams, charts and detailed problems between you, your illustrations. These practical manuals authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. make it easy for students and technicians To contact NHTSA, you may call the to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at features. They show exactly how to find 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: and correct problems the first time, using 1-800-424-9153); or go to step-by-step troubleshooting and http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: drivability procedures, proven diagnostic Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . 266 Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at: 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com

267 This page is intentionally left blank

268 INDEX Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....159 Certification Label ...... 180 Accessories Purchased By The Alfa DNA System...... 156 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 222 Owner...... 4 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System . . .102 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 224 Active Safety Systems ...... 102 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 258 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) Automatic Climate Controls ...... 47 Indicator Light) ...... 98 System ...... 105 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 36 Checking Levels ...... 212 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Automatic Headlights ...... 38 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .140 (Cruise Control) ...... 164 Automatic Temperature Control Checks, Safety ...... 140 Off...... 165 (ATC)...... 47 Child Restraint ...... 129 On...... 165 Automatic Transmission ...... 150 Child Restraints Additives, Fuel ...... 257 Auxiliary Driving Systems...... 105 Booster Seats ...... 131 AFS Function ...... 39 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 65 Child Seat Installation ...... 138 AirBag...... 121 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Air Bag Operation ...... 122 B-Pillar Location ...... 228 Belt ...... 136 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 120 Battery ...... 214 Infant And Child Restraints .....131 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 123 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....17 LATCH Positions ...... 133 Enhanced Accident Battery Recharging ...... 215 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Response ...... 126,206 Children ...... 133 Belts, Seat ...... 140 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....206 Older Children And Child Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 105 Front Air Bag ...... 121 Restraints ...... 131 Bodywork (Cleaning And Seating Positions ...... 132 If Deployment Occurs ...... 125 Maintenance) ...... 241 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 256 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 123 Brakes ...... 250 Cleaning Maintaining YourAir Bag System .129 Brake Fluid Level ...... 214 Wheels ...... 236 Maintenance ...... 129 Brightness, Interior Lights ...... 43 Climate Control...... 46 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .121 Bulbs, Light ...... 141 Automatic ...... 47 Side Air Bags ...... 123 Compact Spare Tire ...... 236 Transporting Pets ...... 139 Camera, Rear ...... 177 Contract, Service...... 265 Air Bag Light...... 120,140 Capacities, Fluid ...... 258 Cooling System Air Pressure Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 140 Cooling Capacity ...... 258 Tires ...... 231 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .258 Emergency Flashers Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb In Case Of ...... 198,222 Hazard Warning ...... 186 Replacement) ...... 190 Emergency, In Case Of Turn Signals ...... 40,141

INDEX Cruise Control (Speed Control) .162,164 Jump Starting ...... 201 Fluid Capacities...... 258 Cupholder ...... 65 Overheating ...... 203 Fluid Leaks ...... 142 Cupholders ...... 65 Emission Control System Fluids And Lubricants ...... 259 Customer Assistance ...... 264 Maintenance...... 98 Forward Collision Warning ...... 108 Engine ...... 247 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Daytime Running Lights...... 38 Block Heater ...... 147 Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...... 38 Engine Coolant Level ...... 213 (Bulb Replacement)...... 189 Defroster, Windshield ...... 141 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 140 Front Seat Electric Heating ...... 30 Dimensions ...... 253 Fuel Requirements ...... 256 Front Seats (Power Adjustment) ....28 Direction Indicators (Changing A Oil...... 258 Fuel Bulb)...... 189 Oil Selection ...... 258 Additives ...... 257 Disabled VehicleTowing...... 204 Overheating ...... 203 Clean Air ...... 256 Door Light ...... 42 Starting ...... 203 Ethanol ...... 256 Door Locks ...... 26 Engine Compartment ...... 212 Materials Added ...... 257 Doors...... 23 Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .242 Methanol ...... 256 Drive Train Control (DTC) System . . .102 Engine Oil Tank Capacity ...... 258 Driving Modes ...... 156 Level Check ...... 213 Fuse Boxes ...... 192 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Engine Overheating ...... 203 Fuses (Replacement) ...... 191 System ...... 105 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...... 126,206 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....62 Electric Park Brake...... 147 Ethanol ...... 256 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 256 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 36 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 140 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 256 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Exhaust System ...... 140 General Information ...... 107,112 Control) ...... 162 Exterior Lighting ...... 38,39 Glove Compartment ...... 61 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Glove Compartment Light ...... 42 System ...... 103 Exterior Lights ...... 38,141 Glove Compartment Light (Bulb Instrument Panel Automatic Headlights ...... 38 Replacement) ...... 190 Features ...... 68 Courtesy/Reading ...... 41,42 GVWR...... 180 Interior Ambient Lighting ...... 42 Daytime Running ...... 38 Interior Lights...... 41 Exterior...... 141 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 186 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 242 Headlight Switch ...... 38,39 Head Restraints ...... 33 Internal Equipment ...... 61 Headlights ...... 38,39 Head Rests ...... 33 High Beam ...... 39 Headlights Jack Operation ...... 222 Instrument Cluster ...... 38,39 Switch ...... 38,39 Jump Starting ...... 201 Intensity Control ...... 43 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 242 Interior ...... 42 Heated Mirrors ...... 37 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 24 Map...... 41 Heated Steering Wheel ...... 36 Passive Entry ...... 24 Park...... 38 Heater, Engine Block...... 147 Keys...... 16 Reading ...... 41 High Beam Headlights...... 39 Turn Signals ...... 40,141 Automatic High Beam Headlights . . .39 Lane Change ...... 40 Loading Vehicle ...... 180 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System .....104 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 40 Tires ...... 228 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ....62 Lane Change Assist ...... 174 Locks Hood ...... 55 LaneSense...... 174 Child Protection ...... 27 Closing ...... 55 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 116 Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb Opening ...... 55 Latches...... 142 Replacement) ...... 190 Leaks, Fluid ...... 142 Identification Data ...... 246 Life Of Tires ...... 234 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Ignition...... 19 Liftgate ...... 56 Engine) ...... 98 Switch ...... 19 Lifting The Vehicle ...... 222 Manual Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 20 Light Bulbs...... 141 Service ...... 266 Installing Electrical/Electronic Types Of Bulbs ...... 187 Methanol...... 256 Devices...... 4 Light Switch...... 38 Mirrors...... 36 Instrument Cluster...... 68 Lights...... 141 Automatic Dimming ...... 36 Display ...... 70 AirBag...... 120,140 Electric Powered ...... 36 Electric Remote ...... 36 Power Sunroof ...... 54 Rims And Tires ...... 223 Heated ...... 37 Power Supply ...... 248 Roll Over Warning ...... 3 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .118 INDEX OBD System ...... 98 Pretensioners Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 140 Occupant Restraints...... 114 Seat Belts ...... 118 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....141 Oil, Engine Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 240 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 266 Capacity ...... 258 Safety Information, Tire...... 223 Recommendation ...... 258 Radial Ply Tires ...... 233 Safety Tips ...... 140 Viscosity ...... 258 Radio Frequency Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 140 Operator Manual General Information ...... 18,20,26 Saving Fuel ...... 181 Owner's Manual ...... 266 Radio Transmitters And Mobile Scheduled Servicing ...... 208 Phones ...... 4 Outlet Scheduled Servicing Program (2.9L Power...... 65 Rear Armrest ...... 66 V6 Gasoline Engine Versions). . . .209 Overheating, Engine ...... 203 Rear Camera ...... 177 Seat Belts ...... 115,140 Rear Cross Path ...... 105 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 118 Paintwork (Cleaning And Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...... 45 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Maintenance) ...... 241 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 256 Anchorage ...... 118 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .104 Refueling Procedure ...... 178 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Park Assist ...... 171 Refueling The Vehicle ...... 178 Anchorage ...... 118 ParkSense System ...... 171 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 115 Child Restraints ...... 129 Passive Entry ...... 24 Remote Keyless Entry...... 16 Energy Management Feature . . . .119 Performance (Top Speed)...... 261 Remote Starting System ...... 144 Front Seat ...... 115,116 Pets...... 139 Replacement Tires ...... 235 Inspection ...... 140 Placard, Tire And Loading Replacing A Bulb ...... 186 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .117 Information ...... 228 Replacing An External Bulb ...... 189 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 116 Power Pregnant Women ...... 118 Mirrors ...... 36 Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 190 Pretensioners ...... 118 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . .65 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 266 Rear Seat ...... 116 Seats ...... 28 Restraints, Child ...... 129 Reminder ...... 115 Sunroof ...... 54 Restraints, Head ...... 33 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 118 Cold Weather ...... 145 General Information ...... 231,235 Untwisting Procedure ...... 117 Starting Procedures ...... 203 High Speed ...... 232 Seats ...... 28 Starting The Engine ...... 144 Inflation Pressure ...... 231 Adjustment ...... 28 Steering ...... 252 Jacking ...... 222 Head Restraints ...... 33 Wheel Locking ...... 20 Life Of Tires ...... 234 Height Adjustment ...... 28 Wheel, Heated ...... 36 Load Capacity ...... 228 Power...... 28 Wheel, Tilt ...... 35 Quality Grading ...... 239 Tilting ...... 28 Steering Wheel ...... 35 Radial ...... 233 Security Alarm ...... 21 Stop/Start System...... 159 Replacement ...... 235 Service Assistance...... 264 Suggestions For Driving...... 181 Safety ...... 223,231 Service Contract ...... 265 Sun Roof...... 54 Sizes ...... 224 Service Manuals ...... 266 Sun Visors ...... 62 Snow Tires ...... 238 Servicing Procedures ...... 216 Supplemental Restraint System – Spare Tires ...... 235,236 Shoulder Belts ...... 116 AirBag...... 121 Spinning ...... 234 Signals, Turn...... 40,141 Suspension ...... 251 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 234 Snow Chains...... 238 Symbols ...... 7 Towing Snow Tires...... 238 Disabled Vehicle ...... 204,205 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 35 Spare Tires ...... 235,236 Towing Eyes ...... 205 Tilt Steering Column...... 35 Speed Control TowingThe Vehicle ...... 205 Accel/Decel ...... 163 Tire And Loading Information TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Placard ...... 228 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 166 System)...... 112 Tire Markings ...... 223 Cancel ...... 164,169 Traction Control System (TCS).....103 Tire Safety Information ...... 223 Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . .168 Transmission ...... 249 Tire Service Kit ...... 198 Resume ...... 164 Transporting Pets ...... 139 Tires ...... 141,231,235,239 Set...... 163 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 234 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 234 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .162 Turn Signals ...... 40 Air Pressure ...... 231 Speed Limiter...... 161 Changing ...... 198 Starting Button ...... 19 Compact Spare ...... 236 Uconnect Settings Vehicle Loading ...... 180,228 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 236 Customer Programmable Vent Operation ...... 46 Wheels And Tires ...... 223 Features ...... 24 Windows (Cleaning) ...... 242 INDEX Passive Entry Programming .....24 Warnings, Roll Over ...... 3 Windshield Defroster ...... 141 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 239 Warranty Information ...... 265 Windshield Wiper ...... 43 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .117 Washer Fluid For Replacing Blades ...... 219 Windshield/Headlights...... 214 Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 6 Windshield Wipers ...... 43 Washers, Windshield...... 43 Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 4 Weights ...... 255 Vehicle Identification Number .....246 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 236 Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING normal may require special precautions. EQUIPMENT All installations should be checked for possible interfer- Special design considerations are incorporated into this ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio vehicle’s electronic systems. frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING: The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Operating, servicing and maintaining a The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals This connection should not be fused. including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the phthalates, and lead, which are known to roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm. affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to your vehicle. For more information go to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. QUADRIFOGLIO OWNER’S MANUAL OWNER’S 2019 QUADRIFOGLIO

2019 STELVIO QUADRIFOGLIO Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GUQUAD-126-AB 19GUQUAD-126-AB ROMEO STELVIO ALFA QUADRIFOGLIO Second Edition Manual Owner’s